<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Steiny</id>
	<title>English DMXC-Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Steiny"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Steiny"/>
	<updated>2026-08-24T03:10:04Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.10</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Output_plugins_DMXC2&amp;diff=3459</id>
		<title>Output plugins DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Output_plugins_DMXC2&amp;diff=3459"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T20:08:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;24.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
24.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
06.01.2013: UPrenner: update of pictures done&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Devices_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Devices&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Channel_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Channel overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The interface between DMX equipment to be steered DMXControl and this one is realized about a DMX interface. This changes the signals of the PC into the DMX protocol. 512 channels are called as a universe. The interface is mentioned about an output plugin which must be configured in DMXControl. The same applies to a Visualizer, the interface, however, is here „virtual“.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since DMXControl shall work with as many transmitters as possible, these are mentioned about (expandable) Plugins. At the program start DMXControl tries to tie these in his contents directory after files with the ending &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;out.dll&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and tempted. The user can add new interfaces (also called transmitters) so by simply copying files into this list.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_output_plugin_window.png|1|The output plugin window|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several transmitters also can be used parallel. To this is corresponding to provide all required interface plugins with a hooklet in the version plugin configuration menu. This can make sense since problems with single transmitters can appear as experience shows at a cheap devices. So one can form different DMX chains with the more favorable combination. Either one lets distribute on all transmitters all values (per default) or one divides up address ranges if the transmitters support start addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance of the button &amp;amp;laquo; Configure selected plugin &amp;amp;raquo; is the button &amp;amp;laquo; Enable Plugins for users without administration privileges &amp;amp;raquo; Users who don&#039;t have any administration rights at the PC can avoid this here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Controls==    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Configure selected plugin:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some interface Plugins permit the attitude of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Low level&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters, such as break times. E.g. one should ask about the meaning here in appropriate sources e.g. http://www.soundlight.de/techtips/dmx512/dmx512.htm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;If you have an link to a good english explanination of DMX512, than replace the link.&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have developed an interface of your own, you can simply write an Ausgabeplugin of your own and therefore use the interface together with DMXControl relatively.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a starting point for her own implementation you can example Plugins download (Visual BASIC 6) here. The Visual BASIC example is commented on extensively and describes the version Plugin mechanism. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the download no registration is necessary among us but it would be very beautiful if you get in touch with us if you have written a new Plugin. We can remain up to date about the available drivers and indicate these on the home page only in such a way. Many thanks!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visual Basic 6.0 Demoplugin mit DMX-In === &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date/Time:&#039;&#039;&#039; 29.10.2005/17:35 &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author:&#039;&#039;&#039; Stefan Krupop&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Stabil&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;http://www.dmxcontrol.de/files/interfaces/dmxc2_output_sample.zip&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This Plugin provides a skeleton for developments of its own and leads into the operation of the output plugin system briefly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links and References==&lt;br /&gt;
Links &lt;br /&gt;
* Infos zum DMX-Standard: http://www.soundlight.de/techtips/dmx512/dmx512.htm&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Devices_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Devices&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Channel_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Channel overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Ausgabeplugins DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_output_plugin_window.png&amp;diff=3458</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual output plugin window.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_output_plugin_window.png&amp;diff=3458"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T20:04:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: DMXControl 2, Manual, chapter 7 &amp;quot;Plugin-Administration&amp;quot;: Plugin-Administration view&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DMXControl 2, Manual, chapter 7 &amp;quot;Plugin-Administration&amp;quot;: Plugin-Administration view&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Devices_DMXC2&amp;diff=3457</id>
		<title>Devices DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Devices_DMXC2&amp;diff=3457"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:38:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;24.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
24.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
06.01.2013: UPrenner: update of pictures done&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Output_plugins_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Output plugins&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The device list contains all devices ([[Glossar_DMXC2#DDF|DDF&#039;s]]) selected for the project like the graphical view and lists these openly with several parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_device_list_window.png|1|Device list|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important data of everyone already become available equipment as well as their graphic position on the [[graphical_ view_DMXC2|graphical view]] shown in the device list (figure 1) in the project. The data are column-wise arbitrarily sortable. The device list lets himself exclusively over the menu &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; Menu item &amp;amp;laquo; Device &amp;amp;raquo; calls and can over the button &amp;amp;laquo; Copy to clipboard &amp;amp;raquo; be copied as tab-separate text into the intermediate file to be used further so in other programs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The device names can be renamed to the better re-reconnaissance and the DMX address can comfortably in the decimal and be binary system entered (DIP switch). &lt;br /&gt;
In addition, have the x and y positions of the icons read in the graphic stage view to themselves. Should these are untraceable on the graphic stage view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further attitudes of the device selected can over the button &amp;amp;laquo; Configure &amp;amp;raquo; at highlighted equipment over the window &amp;amp;laquo; Configure device &amp;amp;raquo; being carried out. A detailed description is in the &#039;&#039;chapter 4 graphic one stage view&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding equipment is carried out via the button &amp;amp;laquo; Add &amp;amp;raquo;, in which himself as in the case of the graphical view the window &amp;amp;laquo; Add device &amp;amp;raquo; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Color and Gobo lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl also provides the possibility of working with Color and Gobo lists. One can lay out different lists for a different devices or also at scanners and movingheads which these have exchanged colors or gobos for themselves which then are assigned to the device. The advantage is that one doesn&#039;t have to change the device definition file every time but can assign the new colors or Gobos via the Color and Gobo lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The construction of a Color or Gobo list new to one is carried out in the menu &amp;amp;laquo; Configuration &amp;amp;raquo; with the two menu items &amp;amp;laquo; Color lists &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; Gobo lists &amp;amp;raquo; The assignment of the prepared lists is, in which, at the corresponding points which Color or Gobo list select by drop down carried out one in the device configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also have to the function be input for Color and Gobo lists in the corresponding device definition file so that the whole also really works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Output_plugins_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Output plugins&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Geräte_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_device_list_window.png&amp;diff=3456</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual device list window.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_device_list_window.png&amp;diff=3456"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:36:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 5 &amp;quot;Device list&amp;quot;: Device list view&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 5 &amp;quot;Device list&amp;quot;: Device list view&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Devices_DMXC2&amp;diff=3455</id>
		<title>Devices DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Devices_DMXC2&amp;diff=3455"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:35:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;24.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
24.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Output_plugins_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Output plugins&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The device list contains all devices ([[Glossar_DMXC2#DDF|DDF&#039;s]]) selected for the project like the graphical view and lists these openly with several parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_device_list_window.png|1|Device list|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important data of everyone already become available equipment as well as their graphic position on the [[graphical_ view_DMXC2|graphical view]] shown in the device list (figure 1) in the project. The data are column-wise arbitrarily sortable. The device list lets himself exclusively over the menu &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; Menu item &amp;amp;laquo; Device &amp;amp;raquo; calls and can over the button &amp;amp;laquo; Copy to clipboard &amp;amp;raquo; be copied as tab-separate text into the intermediate file to be used further so in other programs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The device names can be renamed to the better re-reconnaissance and the DMX address can comfortably in the decimal and be binary system entered (DIP switch). &lt;br /&gt;
In addition, have the x and y positions of the icons read in the graphic stage view to themselves. Should these are untraceable on the graphic stage view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further attitudes of the device selected can over the button &amp;amp;laquo; Configure &amp;amp;raquo; at highlighted equipment over the window &amp;amp;laquo; Configure device &amp;amp;raquo; being carried out. A detailed description is in the &#039;&#039;chapter 4 graphic one stage view&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding equipment is carried out via the button &amp;amp;laquo; Add &amp;amp;raquo;, in which himself as in the case of the graphical view the window &amp;amp;laquo; Add device &amp;amp;raquo; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Color and Gobo lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl also provides the possibility of working with Color and Gobo lists. One can lay out different lists for a different devices or also at scanners and movingheads which these have exchanged colors or gobos for themselves which then are assigned to the device. The advantage is that one doesn&#039;t have to change the device definition file every time but can assign the new colors or Gobos via the Color and Gobo lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The construction of a Color or Gobo list new to one is carried out in the menu &amp;amp;laquo; Configuration &amp;amp;raquo; with the two menu items &amp;amp;laquo; Color lists &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; Gobo lists &amp;amp;raquo; The assignment of the prepared lists is, in which, at the corresponding points which Color or Gobo list select by drop down carried out one in the device configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also have to the function be input for Color and Gobo lists in the corresponding device definition file so that the whole also really works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Output_plugins_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Output plugins&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Geräte_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Graphical_view_DMXC2&amp;diff=3454</id>
		<title>Graphical view DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Graphical_view_DMXC2&amp;diff=3454"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:18:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;23.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
24.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
06.01.2013: UPrenner: update of pictures done&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Control_center_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Control Center&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Devices_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Devices&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The graphical view offers the possibility of adding to the project and addressing equipment exactly like the module device list. One can to end you about that the project already in the front-end, in dependence on the later real construction abgebilden (approximate positioning). The wallpaper is freely eligible for office and can have the formats . gif, . bmp or . jpg. In addition, it offers the possibility of checking all real equipment for heart and kidneys shortly after the construction. This is particularly very helpful at DDFs made newly.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_window.png|1|The graphical view|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The graphical view lets himself over the menu &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; Menu item &amp;amp;laquo; Graphical view &amp;amp;raquo; as well as calling about the accompanying symbol in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_module_icon.png|2|The module symbol|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual equipment icons are established tightly on her position and can be worked and moved only about the context menu. &lt;br /&gt;
A link click on a device opens the [[Glossar_DMXC2#DDF|DDF]]-window (see figure 3),  which shows all DMX channels assigned to the device with graphic manipulators. The example shows the DDF of the Generic dimmer which has a dimmer channel. A double click on the icon of the DDFs puts the value of the dimmer of the device on 0 or 100%. This has to be changed as the only channel also directly under the icon with the mouse without opening the DDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint| Text = The &#039;&#039;&#039;DDF&#039;&#039;&#039; is the device description file, including the channel assignment of the equipment, similary like it is, in DMXControl are at hardware consoles the Fixtures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You find detailed information about the DDF construction in [[DDF_DMXC2|chapter 32 DDF basics]] as well as in the [[DDF_Creator_DMXC2|chapter 33 The DDFCreator]].)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a very big set one can, however, lose the summary fast on one single view. DMXControl therefore offers the possibility of dividing the equipment up on several tab or page tabs views. Over the adding, editing, and deleting badge, on right above, be able to be several tabs made or managed. Any tab view produced newly can take a wallpaper of its own and therefore permits to subdivide the stage into different sections. If a device shall be visible on several tabs, then a new DDF must be inserted for everybody. The start addresses of the DDFs must be the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_Tabs.png|3|Graphical view with several tabs|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New background image simply find in the directory &amp;quot;&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;...\DMXControl\Resources\Stage Images&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot; to be stored and used. A choice is in this list already after the installation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_cicle2.png|circle2&lt;br /&gt;
File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view pyramid.png|pyramid_top&lt;br /&gt;
File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_quad.top.png|quad_top&lt;br /&gt;
File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view flying.top..png|flying_top&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAttention‎| Text = The stage view has the highest priority regarding the control. Channel changes are therefore suppressed by a change in other modules, such as in the sound Analyzer, in the graphic stage view. Only a pressure on the &amp;amp;laquo; Reset &amp;amp;raquo; This one lifts over-spelling the S2L button or the adjust renewed of the other module (here: deactivate and activate again) again.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Controls==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The window of the graphic stage view provides operating devices still following apart from the standard icons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name &lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_selection.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Selection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button selection mode has the click with the left mouse button, choice rectangle with which the same equipment which is inside can be selected. The selection of single equipment works also with the Windows standard function CTRL and left click on the corresponding same equipment. This way equipment can be grouped. Also see section group. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_moving.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Moving mode&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| On the other hand, in the moving mode left click can be moved the wallpaper with the mouse. This can be used instead of the shoving joists if the graphical window is smaller than the background image.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Freeze.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Unlike the Freeze button in the control center the Freeze button freezes only the version that one the graphical view in the graphical view. The version of all other modules remains active.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Reset.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| A click on the Reset button sets the channels on the predefined DDF values again. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Except of the icons, there are also two context menu that appear by clicking with the right mouse button in the graphical view. A context menu will appear with the right click on the background image, the other context menu when right clicking on a device icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Context menu by right clicking on background image.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Menu item &lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Change background picture&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| When selecting this menu item opens a file dialog where the image of the background image can be selected. Open is confirmed with the button loads the image in the selected tab view. Images can be loaded in . gif, . bmp or . jpg format. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Add Device&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Opens the &#039;Add device&#039; dialog window. (see Add Device section)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Device positioning mode&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Turn on the equipment positioning mode. Devices can be moved now directly with the left mouse button and positioned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(This mode should be quit after use)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Align to grid&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| All devices will be align by the internal grid of the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Context menu by right clicking on a Device.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Menu item&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Prefer graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| When selecting this menu item for the selected device, the graphical view of the stage generally has higher priority, as the other modules. This means that the output for the device will not be changed E. g. by ongoing effects.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Move&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| After selecting this menu item, the selected device with the left mouse button on the current tab view can be positioned.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Tab&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| The Create tab views are displayed in the submenu. When selecting the device on the selected tab view is moved.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Delete&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Deletes the selected device from the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Configure&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Opens the settings window from the selected device.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(see Device configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add device==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_add-device.png|4|Add device|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the menu item &amp;amp;laquo; Add device &amp;amp;raquo; from the context menue the &amp;amp;laquo; Add device &amp;amp;raquo;-window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can select from a list of manufacturer (directotrys), your device by opening the Directory of your favorit manufactur.&lt;br /&gt;
In the directorys you find all Devices witch are in already available in DMXControl. There is still the possibility, if the sought-after device shouldn&#039;t be in the list, then in the equipment library &amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Device libary of DMXControl: http://www.dmxcontrol.de/Geraetedefinitionen/Geraetebibliothek.html Not yet Online&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; look on the DMXControl main side or in the DMXControl forum&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Forum von DMXControl: http://www.dmxcontrol.de/forum/index.php?page=Board&amp;amp;boardID=17&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; .&lt;br /&gt;
Another opportunity to get a DDF for your equipment is to read the manual for the [[DDF_DMXC2|chapter 32 &#039;&#039;DDF basics&#039;&#039;]] or the manual part of the [[DDF_Creator_DMXC2|chapter 33 &#039;&#039;The DDF-Creator&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After choice of the corresponding device, further information about the select device appears below the choice window:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name:&#039;&#039;&#039; Name of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Hersteller:&#039;&#039;&#039; the manufacturer of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Author:&#039;&#039;&#039; Author of DDF.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;defined channels:&#039;&#039;&#039; Number of DMX channels which were fixed in the equipment DDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 entry fields are with following functions under this information still:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quantity:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here you can indicate the number of devices of the select type to be inserted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;First start-address:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here you can indicate the start address, as of which device(s) be inserted in the DMX universe. DMXControl manages fitting in with the DMX universe selbsttändig so that one doesn&#039;t have to take care of it.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Space between device addresses:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here one can indicate the distance between the individual equipment in the DMX universe by indicating the number of liberal addresses between the equipment to be inserted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name:&#039;&#039;&#039; After choice of the device the device name which can be overwritten by another name is shown here. If several equipment is inserted, then DMXControl attaches the name at the end a parenthetic ongoing number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a click on the &amp;amp;laquo; OK &amp;amp;raquo; or &amp;amp;laquo; Cancel &amp;amp;raquo; DMX Control inserts the device in the graphical view or rejects the choice. The window became &amp;amp;laquo; OK &amp;amp;raquo; the device appears also in the device window, completed, (see the next chapter).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text = If new DDF files are inserted in the folder &#039;&#039;DEVICEs&#039;&#039;, then the DDF short list becomes aktuallisiert only at a program restart. If e. g. a DDF is updated with the DDFCreator, then it depends how serious the change is. At changes at the DDF surface, the behavior of a DDF control element or the Proceduren it suffices to close the DDF window and to open again. If the number of channels is changed, then DMXControl must be started newly.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure device==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_configure_device.png|5|Configure device|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
If you selecting the menu item &amp;amp;laquo; configure device &amp;amp;raquo; the window &amp;amp;laquo opens in the context menu of the graphic stage view &amp;amp;laquo; configure device &amp;amp;raquo;. Various attitudes let himself change, in this window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Adjustment&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Button: Change picture&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| At the click on the badge a list from which one can deposit another icon picture from the DMXControl icon list for the device opens. The icons are in the DMXControl contents directory &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.../DMXControl\DEVICES\images\&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Button: Reset picture&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| At the click on the badge the icon picture is moved back again on the standard picture which was fixed in the device definition file. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Here you can change the name of the device. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Adress&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Here you can change the DMX-Adress later on. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Color list&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Her you can select predefined Color lists. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Color filter&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Here you can select a color filter for PAR headlights. You needed this if in the program settings at graphiccal view is select the option &#039;&#039;Use presentation of color instead of graphic&#039;&#039; in the rider. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Gobo list&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Her you can select predefined Gobo lists.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| At choice of this option the dimmer is assigned to the grand master or the secondary grand master. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pan/Tilt: Invert&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| If the device is a scanner or Movinghead, the Pan or Tilt can here if necessary be inverted. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pan/Tilt: Offset&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Here you can add a offset on the Pan and Tilt to adapt e.g. an existing project on a similar location for themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pan/Tilt: Scale&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 425px&amp;quot;| Here you can scale the Pan and Tilt to adapt e.g. an existing project on a similar however smaller location for themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on &amp;amp;laquo; OK &amp;amp;raquo; or &amp;amp;laquo; Cancel &amp;amp;raquo; is the configuration saved or rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group devices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_groupingg.png|6|Konfigure device|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
As operating devices described in the period, there is the multiple selection of the same device by means of the &#039;&#039;CTRL button&#039;&#039; or the button &amp;amp;laquo; Selection mode &amp;amp;raquo;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These groupings can be stored for later purposes in the module window group choice. The group choice can be called over the menu window and the menu item group selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the window group selection the group can a name be assigned and the delection then with this &amp;amp;laquo; Add &amp;amp;raquo; button being stored. At selection with the mouse the devices is selected in the graphical view now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the first entry in the window of the group selection &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;removing selection&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;, the corresponding devices becomes deselektiert again. Becoming the new devices selected and the before select at choice of another entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module commands==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module-related commands for the group selection consist of it &#039;&#039;&#039;module:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;group selection&#039;&#039; and the corresponding entries from the group selection window under &#039;&#039;&#039;device/function:&#039;&#039;&#039; which one, at long last by the order &#039;&#039;&#039; channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; selects actively be.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The module-related commands apply both to the graphical view and to the device window. The orders refer available device (DDFs) to it essentially in DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Module: &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;device/function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Selected&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| The broader parameters are/the select device(s) in the graphical view used only on this.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Dimmer, Pan, Tilt&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Channel 1 - 32&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| For the select device a corresponding value can the appropriate channel be selected and be assigned in the column &#039;&#039;value&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Pan invert&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Tilt invert&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pan &amp;amp; Tilt invert.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| There is here the possibility at scanners and movingheads to inverting the axes by command.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| Other entries&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| All device which was added to the current project is below of &#039;&#039;select device&#039;&#039;. Here you can direct select a device on which the broader parameters are used.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Select&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| The corresponding device is selected in the graphical view. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Deselect&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| The selection for the corresponding device is deselected in the graphical view. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Switch selection&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| The selection for the corresponding device is inverted in the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Other channel items&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| For the select device the appropriate channel can be selected. These are, indicated in the DDF, shown to names of the channels. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Pan invert&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Tilt invert&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pan &amp;amp; Tilt invert.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 195px&amp;quot;| There is here the possibility at scanners and movingheads to inverting the axes by command. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Module: &#039;&#039;&#039;Group selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;device/function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;Remove selection&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| A before select grouping will be resetted.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Select&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The group standing under device/function will selected. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Group name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The group mit dem group name will selected fom the grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Select&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The group standing under device/function will selected. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meaning of the &#039;&#039;Flags&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 35px&amp;quot;|  Flag&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| T&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Toggle mode&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the function&#039;s being set by the first call and being reset by the second call.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| O&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Used specified value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Used specified value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being assigned to the appropriate channel of the value in the openings&#039; value. This value isn&#039;t DMX value 0 to 255 but a per cent value 0. 000 to 100. 000% &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| A&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ask for value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ask for value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the opening at call of the order of an input window in which the per cent value can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| I&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ignore value 0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being ignored of a value of zero. Do you need at some orders to ensure a correct function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Try out the movement mode by adjusting the zoom value 2:1 and then moving the picture. &lt;br /&gt;
* If after work in the device positioning mode or moving a device disappears apparently, please check the position of the equipment in the device list. Only two icons probably have slipped about each other or the device is outside the processing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links and References==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Control_center_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Control Center&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Devices_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Devices&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Grafische_Bühnenansicht_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_Tabs.png&amp;diff=3453</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view Tabs.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_Tabs.png&amp;diff=3453"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:16:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: Uprenner uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view Tabs.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_window.png&amp;diff=3452</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view window.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_graphical_view_window.png&amp;diff=3452"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:11:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: Uprenner uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:DMXC2 Manual graphical view window.png&amp;amp;quot;: DMXControl 2, manual, chapter 4 &amp;quot;graphical view&amp;quot;: the window of the graphical view&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DMXControl 2, manual, chapter 4 &amp;quot;graphical view&amp;quot;: the window of the graphical view&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png&amp;diff=3451</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual control center window.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png&amp;diff=3451"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T19:03:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: Uprenner uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:DMXC2 Manual control center window.png&amp;amp;quot;: DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 3 &amp;quot;Control Center&amp;quot;: DMXControl 2 Control Center View&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 3 &amp;quot;Control Center&amp;quot;: DMXControl 2 Control Center View&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3450</id>
		<title>Control center DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3450"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T18:50:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
23.10.2013: UPrenner: article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
06.01.2013: UPrenner: update of pictures done&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review and correction passed by ‎Djrocket&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_program_icon.png|1|DMXControl&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Program icon|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
Once DMXControl starts by double clicking the program icon, (see figure 1) DMXControl&#039;s control center opens (see figure 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This window give the operator easy access to all the main modules, tools and configurations of DMXControl. In addition, other configuration setting are available with the menu items &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Configuration &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a status line which displays the path and the file of the loaded project and also the approximate load of DMX Control&#039;s internal message system on the lower window edge window. In addition, the date, the current system time and the version number are also shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png|2|The control center of DMXControl|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* to open, save and quit your show (menue &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to get all your tools from DMXControl (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to [[Program_settings_DMXC2|setup]] your system (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Settings &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to call the support funktions  (menue &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Control elements==&lt;br /&gt;
===The FILE Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Windows items are located in the FILE menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-new.png|Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| New project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Start a new project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-open.png|Öffnen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open an existing project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-save.png|Speichern]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| CTRL+S&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Overwrites the currently selected project. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project as...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Save the project in a selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pack &amp;amp; Go...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Archiving a complete project, e.g. to move it to a new or second computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|(see chapter 31)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Exit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Quits DMXControl and displays the usual safety and exit queries.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WINDOW Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Window&#039; menu includes many important items to DMXControl, Any installed Plugins are also shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
====First Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_channel_overview.png|Channel overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Channel overview&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the channel overview window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Channel_overview_DMXC2|(see chapter 8)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Devices&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the device window for managing your devices.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-graphical_view.png|Graphical_view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the graphical view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Group selection&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the group selection window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2#Group_devices|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Second Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_Icon-BeatTool.png|BeatTool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| BeatTool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the BeatTool window for sound-to-light-control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[BeatTool_DMXC2|(see chapter 15)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command line&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command line window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[command_line_DMXC2|(see chapter 20)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Command_box.png|Kommandobox]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command Box&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Command_Box_DMXC2|(see chapter 16)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXIn remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the DMXIn remote control for activating the DMXIn remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup of the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Midi remote control for activating the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Keyboard control window for activating the Keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Master.png|Master]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Master&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the master window with the master fader.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Master_DMXC2|(see chapter 13)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| PDA remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for PDA setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[PDA_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 24)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the scheduler window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scheduler_DMXC2|(see chapter 21)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Third Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-audio_player.png|Audio player]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Audio player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the audio player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Audioplayer_DMXC2|(see chapter 17)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-chasers_tool.png|Chasers Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Chasers Tool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the chasers tool window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Chasers_tool_DMXC2|(see chapter 11)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-cue_list.png|Szenenliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Cue List&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue List window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Cue_list_DMXC2|(see chapter 10)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-sound_analyzer.png|Sound analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Sound analyzer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the sound analyzer window for sound-to-light setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Sound_analyzer_DMXC2|(see chapter 14)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Submaster.png|Submaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Submaster&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the submaster window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Submaster_DMXC2|(see chapter 12)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Textbook.png|Textbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Textbook&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the textbook window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Textbook_DMXC2|(see chapter 19)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Timecode player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the timecode player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Timecode_player_DMXC2|(see chapter 18)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fourth Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show cue libary&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+B&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue libary window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scenes_DMXC2|(see chapter 9)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Edit view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+E&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Hides menu items for live operating.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Fetching all windows on the primary desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If you work with several monitors, it can happen on the return to the single monitor mode that windows are still on the now virtual monitor. With this function, you can get missing windows back to your primary monitor. It is premiss that the window is open.  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The SETTINGS Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which serve the configuration of DMXControl and his modules are in the menu configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Output plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the output plugins.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Output_plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 7)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;d&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the plugins for advance functions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 30)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Program settings...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the program settings window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Program_settings_DMXC2|(see chapter 29)]] &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMX-In remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the DMX-In remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;|Color lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the color lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Gobo lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the gobo lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Shape editor...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window of the shape editor for the motion cue.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Shape_editor_DMXC2|(see chapter 23)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Englisch&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Deutsch&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Language selection for DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Enable experimental tools&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If this menu item is select, then the program parts which weren&#039;t tested substantially yet and are in the beta stage still appear, too. No experimental program parts are integratedly in the 2.12 at the moment, only some of Plugins need this point so that they are shown in. (e. g. the Plugin BeatDetection) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The HELP &amp;quot;?&amp;quot; Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which help you with DMXControl&#039;s operation are in the menu help.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open PDF-manual&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer. The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open online manual &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The english PDF manual is not yet supported, just wait until the translation of the Wiki is finished.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl website&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open the browser on the computer and call the DMXControl website.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl forum&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens your favorit browser on the computer and calls the DMXControl forum, you can receive here here online help of the community.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| About&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the about window, where you can see several informations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Important informations are the relase and build nummber for bug descriptions on the bug tracker or the forum. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show Debug Output&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens a window with informations for debuging in case of bug tracking. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other controls in the control center===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Blackout.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the DMX value output for all channels will be set to 0. The next push restores all DMX values back again. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Freeze.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the output will freeze, this means that the last DMX values will distributed. Any change of DMX values during the freeze will not send to the output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There is also a second freeze button in the graphical view which only there has an effect.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Audio_cue.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Audio playback&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| An audio cue which is running can be stopped early with this button or one of the 16 audio cues can be manipulated over the drop down menu.   &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General controls in DMXControl===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_add.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Add&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button adds is contained in almost all windows in DMXControl and is used for adding new Cues, lists and effects and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_delete.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Delete&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;|If there is a button add, there is also a button delete to purge entry.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_copy.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button copy is placed in in several places and used to copy cues and effects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_rename.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Rename&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button can be used to rename several entrys.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-up.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift up&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys up in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-down.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift down&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys down in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Edit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to edit cues, effcts and lists in DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_reset.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The reset button will set the DMX output from the window to default DMX output.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_play.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Start&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button appears in all places where a sequence can be started from cues for the expiry the start.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module commands==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module commands refers essentially to the button &#039;&#039;blackout&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;freeze&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Module: &#039;&#039;&#039;DMX-Output&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;Device/Function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; inverted the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view. &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; invertst the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meaning of the &#039;&#039;Flags&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 35px&amp;quot;|  Flag&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| T&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Toggle mode&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the function&#039;s being set by the first call and being reset by the second call.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| O&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Used specified value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Used specified value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being assigned to the appropriate channel of the value in the openings&#039; value. This value isn&#039;t DMX value 0 to 255 but a per cent value 0. 000 to 100. 000% &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| A&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ask for value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ask for value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the opening at call of the order of an input window in which the per cent value can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| I&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ignore value 0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being ignored of a value of zero. Do you need at some orders to ensure a correct function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be on the safe side, Projects should regularly be stored during the construction phase under another name (e.g. Yourproject 1,2,3,4,5 etc.). This process will allow you to go back to an older version if necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
The experimental program items are only seen in the menu when the experimental tools are enabled in the SETTINGS menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Steuerzentrum DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_program_icon.png&amp;diff=3449</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual control center program icon.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_program_icon.png&amp;diff=3449"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T18:48:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png&amp;diff=3448</id>
		<title>File:DMXC2 Manual control center window.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png&amp;diff=3448"/>
		<updated>2014-01-06T18:46:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 3 &amp;quot;Control Center&amp;quot;: DMXControl 2 Control Center View&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DMXControl 2, Manual, Chapter 3 &amp;quot;Control Center&amp;quot;: DMXControl 2 Control Center View&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=DDF_DMXC2&amp;diff=3447</id>
		<title>DDF DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=DDF_DMXC2&amp;diff=3447"/>
		<updated>2013-12-19T20:19:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Basic syntax elements and conventions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.10.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;07.11.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
11.11.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Pack_And_Go_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Pack And Go Function&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  DDFCreator_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  DDFCreator&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF_graphical_view.png|1|Graphical view with DDF icon|right|250px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF_example.png|2|Opened DDF window with control elements|right|250px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &#039;&#039;Device Definition File&#039;&#039;. The DDF are the device description (Fixtures) in DMXControl, they serve to inform DMXControl about the functions of the attached DMX device to this. In the DDF the number becomes this one how channels of the DMX device defined and as well these use possible control elements:&lt;br /&gt;
*Position input control element e.g. at Movingheads and Scanners.&lt;br /&gt;
*RGB or CMY color choice control element to the color mixture at e.g. LED headlight or color mixed units at Movingheads.&lt;br /&gt;
*Dropdown control elements&lt;br /&gt;
*Button control elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Become the DDF in the &amp;amp;laquo; graphical view &amp;amp;raquo; with an icon of the device shown (see figure 1), then also can here be accessed the icon, the DDF window by a click with the control elements (see figure 2). XML format which is translated by DMXControl into the internal device description is carried out the description the DMX equipment in one. The DDF are found the DMXControl main directory in the sub-folder &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;DEVICEs&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. The accompanying icon pictures, which one in the &amp;amp; laquo; Graphic stage view &amp;amp; raquo; be, lie in another sub-folder named shown &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;images&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get prefabricated DDFs, which weren&#039;t enclosed at the installation, can you perhaps of the DMXControl home page in the device library&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;GB&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Link Gerätebibliothek:http://www.DMXControl.de/Geraetedefinitionen/Geraetebibliothek.html&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. DDF can be made in a simple way with a XML editor (e. g. PSPad&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Link XML-Editor PSPad:http://www.PSPad.de&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) or also with the [[DDF_Creator_DMXC2|DDFCreator]]. There are advantages and disadvantages with the DDFCreator as also the construction of a DDF with a XML editor. With a XML editor, paraphrasing an existing DDF can be managed considerably faster than with the DDFCreator, against this one is fundamentally faster with the DDFCreator at the construction of a new DDF surface with slidern, button etc. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At both one needs a corresponding knowledge to make an operating DDF no matter whether one now the DDFCreator preferred or the XML editor. Shall the following chapters be conveyed for you, this knowledge among other things the language reference serves as a reference book&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
A very common language syntax which e.g. is also used in the other dialects at web pages or WAP in the Internet sides is XML (e&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;tensible &#039;&#039;M&#039;&#039;arkup &#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;anguage). But you don&#039;t have to be an expert to make a new device description too manually. The following simple notes suffice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please take care that your editor doesn&#039;t store any (invisible) control characters. There won&#039;t be any problems at the Windows editor or PSPad. If you want to use Word or similar software, you should save the file in the raw document format (*.txt).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The DMXControl dialect of XML requires for every opening tag always one (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tag&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) closing (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tag&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) tag. Only this one gets the last level completed just by implication day (e. g. &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;item caption= &amp;quot;white&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
* The final signs &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tag&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; are semantically equivalent, also &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;item caption=&amp;quot;white&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is valid in this case.&lt;br /&gt;
* Every day can have attributes which you find professed in the table below. Every attribute value is started with an equals sign and the value must always be included in double apostrophes.&lt;br /&gt;
* All day and attribute identifiers are noted down at DMXControl in a small letter.&lt;br /&gt;
* The day has to be defined hierarchically. They also should make this recognizable about corresponding indents.&lt;br /&gt;
* As a rule, not cares about the order of the attributes of a day. Where it for once depends on the order anyway, you describe below explicitly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Comment are noted down in the form &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!- This is a comment —&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* E.g. you can have a look at xml files (therefore also the DMX DEVICEs files) in open form with the Internet Explorer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
So it was already this - we have a look at a simple example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example: dimmed spotlight===&lt;br /&gt;
Every device should get an apt icon to receive an adapted representation in stage representation. This icon will be find in the subdirectory Images (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Root:\Programme\DMXControl\Devices\Images&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= The icons afterwards still can be changed in DMXControl. (In the context menu of the graphical view).&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preceding line numbers of the following XML example file cannot be inserted; they serve only the description of the example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;ISO-8859-1&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2 &amp;lt;device image=&amp;quot;light.gif&amp;quot; initsequence=“set 0 128“ &amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3   &amp;lt;channels&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4     &amp;lt;function channel=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; minvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; maxvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;Intensity&amp;quot; fade=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5   &amp;lt;/channels&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6   &amp;lt;form width=&amp;quot;177&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;85&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7     &amp;lt;deviceimage top=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
8     &amp;lt;devicename top=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;40&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
9     &amp;lt;deviceadress top=&amp;quot;16&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;40&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
10    &amp;lt;slider channel=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; startvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; endvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot; top=&amp;quot;40&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;41&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;176&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
11  &amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
12 &amp;lt;/device&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|the Parser will informed about the used XML version.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; valign: top; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|the global description of the new type of device defines inclusive reference to the icon to be put and one ( initialization of the device the optional initsequence was demonstrated here, is but at a headlight only conditionally appropriately. The dimmer channel is (50%) ) put on DMX value 128 at the initialization here.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; valign: top; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|the DMX channels of the device are defined between line 3 and 5.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; valign: top; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|the channel description of the first channel is. This is always the channel numbers at zero important begin, i. e. the first channel is  &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;channel=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. In addition, other parameters as well as the channel name are still put here.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; valign: top; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;6&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|the lines 6-9 describe the form, that is this one, to graphic coordinates in the context menu for the device picture, names and start address in the unity „Pixel“.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; valign: top; margin: 5px;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Row 10&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|here the operating devices follow a slider with his graphic coordinates and the assignment to the channel in question with her qualities, in this example now. Operating devices like radio badges also could, drop down or badges are declared for other types of device here.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF_dimmer.png|3|Dimmer-DDF|center|200px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Three button become Pinup button, Move button, Close button will be generatedly per default generatedly on the top right side (see figure 3).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create a DDF===&lt;br /&gt;
Before you make a new DDF, please have a look on our webside in the device library whether a suitable or similar already give it to definitions for your device. To make a new DDF, you modify an existing DDF of a similar device best. This goes text been based change considerably faster than with the DDF Creator just with this. If you have completed your work, you simply put the xml file in the subdirectory in the DMXControl list „DEVICEs“himself has in your DMX installation as of and store the corresponding gif picture (in the format 32 x32 pixels, the transparency fashion proves itself) in the subdirectory „images“in this „DEVICE“List-. The device should be visible at the next start of DMXControl so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax overview===&lt;br /&gt;
Every description contains four main parts (see figure 4):&lt;br /&gt;
*Description of global qualities &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;device&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (in the example dimmed spotlight line 1-2)&lt;br /&gt;
*Description of the individual DMX channels &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;channels&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (in the example dimmed spotlight line 3-5)&lt;br /&gt;
*Description of the graphic context menu &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;form&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (in the example dimmed spotlight line 6-11)&lt;br /&gt;
*Prozedure code (not contained, optionally in the example)&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF-structure1.png|4|Basic structure of a DDF|center|500px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All form elements must on the will provide DDF form with graphic coordinates to the positioning. The elements „Label“ and „Line“ are passive and serve only the design of the surface. The remaining active elements of the form (also control element mentioned, e.g. on/off) can be used for the active control of the DMX device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Graphical elements====&lt;br /&gt;
The figure 5 shows a survey of all supported graphic elements. An assignment to the required syntax elements is carried out in the explanation texts.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF-structure2.png|5|Graphic elements|center|500px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following figure 6 illustrates the meaning of the graphic coordinates of the control elements:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF-structure3.png|6|Graphic coordinates of the control elements|center|600px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Functional elements====&lt;br /&gt;
The active control elements interact in 3 possible concepts with DMXControl or the device in which exactly one concept is selected at the definition of a concrete control element:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! Konzept &lt;br /&gt;
! Beschreibung &lt;br /&gt;
! Beispiel&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 10px&amp;quot;| 1&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| Channel/Value concept&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The control element is assigned via the channel attribute to a concrete channel. Concrete values or ranges of values which are put at the activity of the control element are defined in the control element.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| - option list&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;caption=&amp;quot;Star sky&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;165&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Value range of the slider&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;startvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; endvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 10px&amp;quot;| 2&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| Sequences&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| An instruction consequence which is executed when operating is defined in the control element as a string.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| clicksequence=&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;“set 1 75; set 2 100“&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 10px&amp;quot;| 3&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| Action/Procedures&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| A separately defined procedure contains more complex program instructions. The procedure is operate assigned via the action attribute and at everybody the control element executed.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| action=&amp;quot;SetGobo&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This which Channel attribute and the action attribute can want to use alternatively in the control elements particularly means.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text=For many applications the first two concepts are sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the complexity and cardinality of the 3 concepts grows, the running time requirements also increase. The simplest variant on the solution of a task should therefore always be chosen. Also at the channel description an action attribute can be used. This means that the procedure is called at every change of the channel value. In figure 7 an example is shown how different control elements can interact with the channels. „So like the complexity and channel_n“address and can over the 3 mentioned above concepts be put. The current value, obliged to it for a control element are, are addressed more than one name freely eligible for office (reference) assigned to the control element here „control_n“bezeichnet. Im following example is for three control elements „Actionses“and additional „Reference names“assigned. And therefore should, as a rule these Actionses be able to do one or &#039;&#039;&#039;put&#039;&#039;&#039; several Channel values „&#039;&#039;&#039;set&#039;&#039;&#039; name“being described. Furthermore there is one „action“ assigned to the channel_3. This is intended to read and to inform about to the control elements the current channel values „assigned to the channel_3. Scheduled, this one are &#039;&#039;&#039;Get&#039;&#039;&#039; name this for this“get since she must &#039;&#039;&#039;read&#039;&#039;&#039; current channel values.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_DDF-structure4.png|7|Interaction of control elements|center|600px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text=The markings of the buttons don&#039;t have a meaning here.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter describes the syntax of the device and form configuration files of DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Generic attributs====&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text=Attributes often recurring are described to it globally once for the shortening with the same meaning after the following tables here.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Reference&lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP1&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| 	Assigned DMX value&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| byte&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| 0, 128, 255&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP2&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Descriptive enumeration value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Explanatory name for an attitude.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Dimmer,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Strobe,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;usw.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP3&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Relative x-coordinate of the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;element of the left upper corner&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| top=“150“&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP4&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Relative x-coordinate of the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;element of the left upper corner.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| left=“100“&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP5&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Width of the element&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| width=“80“&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Height of the element&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| height=“30“&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text=All coordinate details &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(top, left, width, height)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are indicated in pixel.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Device description====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;device&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;image&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Icon filename.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Filename.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Moon.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initsequence&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Sets initial values for the individual DMX channels of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Optional use e.g. for scanner/moving head&#039;s start position&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| set 0 15;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;set 7 128;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;information&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Supplementary comment.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Arbitrary text.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Custom Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;vendor&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Arbitrary text&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(manufacturer).&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Showtec&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;deviceidentifier&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Arbitrary text&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(manufacturer identifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| TG-3&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;author&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Arbitrary text&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(originator).&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;comment&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Arbitrary text&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(comment).&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;help&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Help text (ASCII).&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Channel description====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;channels&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;For every DMX channel is one&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;“&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;function&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;”-part to define&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;function&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;channels&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Internal DMX channel number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;channel no. must always of 0&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;climbing without interruption be&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;defined for the individual channels&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;minvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Minimal DMX value&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;maxvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Maximal DMX value&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Descripting name&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;for the channel.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Intensity&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;fade&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Channel fading&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| yes,no&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;type&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Channel typ&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Important for the internal&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;data handling&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| dimmer, r,g,b,&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;pan, panfine,&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;tilt, tiltfine,&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;color, gobo&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;change of the channel value&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;virtual&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;channels&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;channel&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 4&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;virtual&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Internal DMX channel number&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;The three rgb channels assigned to the virtual dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= The channel type (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;type&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;) also should allocate channel for everybody &lt;br /&gt;
become provided that this channel to the type matches. E.g. it doesn&#039;t make sense to describe every channel as a dimmer.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| reserved for channels these regulate the intensity&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| r,g,b&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| reserve for channels of RGB LED equipment, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;r&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the red channel, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;g&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the green channel, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;b&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the blue channel. On the one hand, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;r, g, b&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; are for the type it HAL needs in DMXControl. This also means, this in the graphical view the colors of the spotlights be shown.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;One can one racks use this in the program configuration under &amp;amp;laquo; graphical view &amp;amp;raquo; and then at &amp;amp;laquo; symbol &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; representation of the colors instead of graphic &amp;amp;raquo;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On the other hand, the type also for the one into the 2.12 new one LED&#039;s run light generator required becomes.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| a,w&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| reserve for channels of (RGB)A as and (RGB)W LED devices, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the amber channel, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;W&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the white channel. The type &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;w&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; aren&#039;t supported by DMXControl yet the device, however, is appropriately since amber or white channel make a bigger and bigger contribution to the market and therefore perhaps are supported by DMXControl soon, too with additional.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| pan, panfine&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| reserve for the Pan channels of scanners, moving heads or similar equipment. How pan is and panfine assigned to the channel for the rough control the channel for the fine control at 16 bits of device.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| tilt, tiltfine&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| as in the case of pan and panfine but for the tilt axis.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| color, gobo&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| The appropriate Farb and Goborad channels can be assigned to (importantly to color &amp;amp; gobo lists)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| c, m, y&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| reserviert für Kanäle von CMY-Geräten, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;c&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; für den Cyan Kanal, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; für den magenta Kanal und &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; für den gelben Kanal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Die types &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;c, m, y&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; werden noch nicht von DMXControl unterstützt sind aber sinnvoll.&lt;br /&gt;
reserved for CMY devices, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;c&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the cyan channel, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the magenta channel, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the yellow channel. The type &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;c, m, y&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; aren&#039;t supported by DMXControl make sense, however, yet.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| other&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: *&amp;quot;| all other channels don&#039;t need a type description&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= The ones for RGB devices reserved &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;type&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;s are important the HAL (Hardware Abstraction Layer) since version 2. 11 in which then be able to the adjusted colors of the spotlight, be represented in the graphical view too. Also for version 2.12, here they also are needed for the RGB running light generator.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Menue description====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;device&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP5; GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;deviceimage&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Absolute position of&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;the shown picture&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;devicename&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Absolute position of&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;the shown name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;deviceaddress&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag von “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Absolute position of&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;the shown base address &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Control elements====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position control=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_position_field_cartesian.png]]&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;[[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_position_field_polar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;position&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a positioning&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;field for positioning from&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;scanners or moving heads.&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;By a click on the button down on the right in the DDF you can switch between a cartesian and polar positioning.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text=The position pointer can be placed by initsequenz&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Slider=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_manual_DDF_slider.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;slider&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a slider&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| 	assigned channel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;startvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Value range of the&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Slider (lower value)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| startvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;endvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Value range of the&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Slider  (uper value)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| endvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;tickfreq&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Scaling, distance of the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;scale subdivision&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| tickfreq=&amp;quot;32&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;smallchange&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Change rate e.g. at the&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;up down keys&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;(VB-properties)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| smallchange=&amp;quot;20&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;largechange&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Change rate e.g. at the&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;mouse click (not draged)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;(VB-properties)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| largechange=&amp;quot;50&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| StrobeSpeed&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;change at the Slider&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;alternative &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetSpeed&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Dropdown=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_manual_DDF_dropdown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;dropdown&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from“&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP5&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assigned channel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Gobo&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;change of a dropdown&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;entries, alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetGobo&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;item&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 4&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dropdown&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Explanatory name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Clear&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| DMX value for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| value=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;minvalue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;maxvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Value range for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; for&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;the diplayed of the dropdown entry.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| minvalue=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;maxvalue=&amp;quot;26&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;color&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Show a square with the assigned color before &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| hex&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| color=&amp;quot;#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Color Red&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;colorlist&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 4&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dropdown&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;All entries of the in color list assigned to the device insert.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional a substitute/&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;addition for&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Item &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gobolist&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 4&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from“&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dropdown&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;All entries of the in gobo list assigned to the device insert.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional a substitute/&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;addition for&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Item &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_manual_DDF_options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a radio button field&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 &amp;amp; GP4&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assigned channel alternative for&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;change of a radio buttons,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetGoboSpeed&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| GoboSpeed&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;option&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 4&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP2&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| off&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| DMX value for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| 0&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 &amp;amp; GP4, relativ position&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;for positioning from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| left=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;top=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====On/Off-Button=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_onoff.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;onoff&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a button as switch&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assigned channel alternative for  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;pushing the buttons&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetLampOnOff&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| LampOnOff&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Explanatory name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On/Off&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;color&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Hex RGB color value of the button&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| hex&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| color=&amp;quot;#00ff00&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;color green&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;onvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| DMX value for button ON&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| onvalue=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;offvalue&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| DMX value for button OFF&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| offvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;onsequence&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Execute a Sequence, by switching to ON&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;quot;set 0 230;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;set 1 25&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;offsequence&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Execute a Sequence, by switching to OFF&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;quot;set 0 0;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;set 1 0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Command-Button=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_manual_DDF_command.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;command&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag for “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a button as push button.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at pushing the button.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetReset&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Explanatory name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;color&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Hex RGB color value of the button&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| color=&amp;quot;#0000ff&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;color blue&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;clicksequence&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Activity to be started at the button click is specified in the attribute&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;set 0 230;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;hold 5500;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;downsequence&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Activity to be started at push down the button is specified in the attribute&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;set 0 230;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;hold 5500;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;upsequence&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Activity to be started at relase the button is specified in the attribute&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;set 0 230;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;hold 5500;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Colorpicker=====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_manual_DDF_colorpicker.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;colorpicker&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a colorpicker.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assignment to 1. channel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;red oder cyan,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assignment to 2. channel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;green or magenta,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Assignment to 3. channel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;blue oder yellow,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Referenz name for procedure code (variable name)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| ColRGB&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;action&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Call of a procedure at&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;changing a color,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;alternative for &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel1-3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;optional&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetColRGB&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;mode&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Choice of the two modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;RGB or CMY &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| mode=“cmy“&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;layout&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Choice of two&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;different layouts from the &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Colorpickers &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| layout=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;colorpicker mode=&amp;quot;rgb&amp;quot; channel1=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; channel2=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; channel3=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; layout=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; top=&amp;quot;40&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
left=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;75&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;177&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= Please keep the mouse button pushed down if you want to change the setting in the color bar over the drop down menu. A direct input of the numeric value is also possible. &lt;br /&gt;
Become the color values in procedures about name:colorchannel provided with references ({ColRGB:1}; {ColRGB:2}; {ColRGB:3}) &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Passive design elements====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute&lt;br /&gt;
! Hierachie and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Notice &lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_line.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;line&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Design element;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Creates a line.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;x1; y1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Start coordinate of the line&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;x2; y2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| End coordinate of the line&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| [[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_label.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Subtag from “&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;form&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;“;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Design element;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;additional description of&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;an operating device.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;top&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;left&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;height&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| See generic attribute&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;GP3 bis GP6&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| integer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;caption&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Text to be shown&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| CMY Mischung&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_Giotto-Spot.png|miniatur|center|600px|Bild 8: DDF Giotto Spot 400]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAdvanced&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= You find this DDF in the [http://www.dmxcontrol.de/Geraetedefinitionen/Geraetebibliothek.html#SGM device libary (at the moment not online)] on the DMXControl Website.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Help====&lt;br /&gt;
In fig. 9 shows an example of a help menu, help menus are optional. It is recommended to announce the DMX occupancy of the device here. The help description is carried out in the ASCII format. Please increase the clarity by formatting with tabulator signs or underlinings. The help can one by click on the question mark button (next to the Pin badge) and be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bild:DMXC2_Manual_DDF_help.png|miniatur|center|600px|Bild 9: Hilfemenü eines DDF&#039;s]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sequences====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Operation&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;save &amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 250px&amp;quot;| Storing the current channel value of the DMX channel intermediately &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#0000FF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;save 0;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; set 0 230; hold 5500; restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;set &amp;gt;channel&amp;lt; &amp;gt;value&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 250px&amp;quot;| Set the channel &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to value&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;value&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#0000FF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;set 0 230;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; hold 5500; restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;hold &amp;gt;time&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 250px&amp;quot;| Timer (wait &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;time&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; in ms)&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0; set 0 230; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#0000FF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;hold 5500;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; restore 0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;restore &amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 250px&amp;quot;| Move the value of the DMX channel stored intermediately &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;channel&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; back again.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;&amp;quot;save 0; set 0 230; hold 5500; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#0000FF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;restore 0&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Procedurs (advanced programming options)===&lt;br /&gt;
The device and form configuration of DMXControl also permits the programming of algorithmic changes of the DMX signals which are executed automatically with the operation of control elements like onoff button, dropdown menu or slider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So you can set conditions and formulae the values which are assigned to the control elements about logical. E.g. the procedures serve to be able to treat multiple occupations of a channel (e.g. gobo rotation lies on the same channel as the gobo selection) so that the value can be calculated differently depending on rotational speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These procedures also permit you the programming of dependences of the channels or operating devices of a device, any colors e.g. you connect certain colors with gobos in a firm or algorithmic assignment or you organize certain speeds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also can at devices with two color wheels, the colors then select more than one drop down or predefined colors have drop down at RGB or CMY devices assigned to one for themselves so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General principles====&lt;br /&gt;
The procedures become this one as an action attribute &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;function&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; tags (channels) or the control elements e.g. &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;onoff&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;slider&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or  &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dropdown&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
With operation of corresponding control elements the code of the procedure is interpreted and executed automatically.  &lt;br /&gt;
The action attribute is against this into assigned, a channel the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;function&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; tag she is executed so at every change of the belonging channel value. &lt;br /&gt;
Using the procedures „References“on the values of the control elements which are declared by the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; attribute within the form definition of the control elements e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dropdown top=&amp;quot;16&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;207&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;113&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;color_color&amp;quot; action=&amp;quot;SetColor&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: The procedure SetColor is executed with operation of the drop down menu and the value of the drop down menu is submitted to the called procedure &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;SetColor&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as a variable &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;color_color&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore implicit references as a default assignment to the channels exist. E.g. that way is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;channel_2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;  with the channel (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;function&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;)  with  &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;channel=2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;  binded,  also the action &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;GetColor&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;function channel=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; minvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; maxvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; fade=&amp;quot;no&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
action=&amp;quot;GetColor&amp;quot; colorchannel=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Till now, variables in the real meaning as freely verifiable loft values aren&#039;t defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic syntax elements and conventions====&lt;br /&gt;
While the references are marked by her name (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;color_color&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;), the current value is addressed by curly brackets of the assigned control element (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;{color_color}&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To simplify the interpretation of the procedure code by a Parser, some conventions you unfortunately must observe although they seem not very user friendly are agreed on in the present program release.  For comparison purposes and the following tables on this one always provide a generic language variant to right sides on the easier to learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following signs serve as sync separators:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Operation&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| !&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| start with an command&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;#124;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| separate the individual components&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;$&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| conclude an order&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following arithmetical operations are supported:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Operation&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;+&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| addition&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| subtraction&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| multiplication&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;/&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| division&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;mod&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 300px&amp;quot;| modulo-Operation&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;(issues the remainder of the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;mod division in the form of result)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every expression must be surrounded by a bracket to be calculated. &lt;br /&gt;
The following examples illustrate the use of arithmetical operations:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! DMXControl code&lt;br /&gt;
! Generic language variant&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| !set_channel|2|(227+{color_speed})$&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| channel_2 := 227 + color_speed&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| !set_channel|3|((({gobos_gobo}-1)*51)+25)$&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| channel_3 := (gobos_gobo-1)*51+25&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| !set_control|gobos_speed|((({channel_3}-1) mod 51)-26)$&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| gobos_speed := ((channel_3 -1) mod 51)-26&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The used standard operators have the following semantics:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Operation&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 160px&amp;quot;| set_control | &amp;gt;cntr&amp;lt; | &amp;gt;val&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 400px&amp;quot;| the control element puts &amp;gt;val&amp;lt; on the value of the expression with the given name &amp;gt;cntr&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 160px&amp;quot;| set_channel | &amp;gt;ch&amp;lt; | &amp;gt;val&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 400px&amp;quot;| &amp;gt;Val&amp;lt; submits the value to the indicated channel &amp;gt;ch&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following relational operators can be used:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Operation&lt;br /&gt;
! Alternative notation&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| &amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| &amp;gt; - &amp;amp;amp;gt; - |gt|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| greater&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt; - &amp;amp;amp;lt; - |lt|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| 	smaller&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| =&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| = - &amp;amp;amp;eq; - |eq|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 185px&amp;quot;| eaqual&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of the comparing operations conditions can be formulated since DMXControl supports the if instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! DMXControl code&lt;br /&gt;
! Generic language variant&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| !if|{channel_3} &amp;amp;lt; 1|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| if channel_3 &amp;lt; 1 then&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
| Text= The procedure “INITCONTROLS”do you execute when opening the form around which Controls put toward the values which are provided by the current DMX values. Into this, so only &amp;quot;Get&amp;quot; functions should be called! However, it is recommended Initcontrols doesn&#039;t have to be defined so that the Controls always show the current condition of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====XML syntax of the procedure code====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Tag &lt;br /&gt;
! Attribute &lt;br /&gt;
! Hierarchy and properties &lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;#60;code&amp;amp;#62;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Subtag from &amp;quot;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#60;device&amp;amp;#62;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;includes all procedures&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;procedure&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Level 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Subtag from &amp;quot;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#60;code&amp;amp;#62;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;includes the code of the procedures&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 75px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#8B0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;name&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Name of the procedures&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| string&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| SetGobo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====An example prozedure====&lt;br /&gt;
This example shows a procedure that sets the values of the control elements &amp;quot;color_color&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;color_speed&amp;quot; a moving heads in relation to the current DMX-value of channel 2 (color changer). The Mac 250 + has 4 options for the color wheel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Solid color (first If in the example below),  &lt;br /&gt;
* Turn clockwise (2. If in the example below),&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn counter clockwise (3 if in the example below), as well as&lt;br /&gt;
* random colors with different speeds (4. If in the example below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the declarations in the configuration file, the relevant variables are highlighted in bold:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;function channel=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; minvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; maxvalue=&amp;quot;255&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; fade=&amp;quot;no&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
action=&amp;quot;GetColor&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
“color_color” is the reference to the value of the dropdown menu for selecting a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dropdown top=&amp;quot;16&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;207&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;113&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;color_color&amp;quot; action=&amp;quot;SetColor&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
“color_speed” is the reference to the value of the slider to the speed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;slider top=&amp;quot;16&amp;quot; left=&amp;quot;320&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;25&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65&amp;quot; startvalue=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; endvalue=&amp;quot;18&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
tickfreq=&amp;quot;9&amp;quot; smallchange=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; largechange=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;color_speed&amp;quot; action=&amp;quot;SetColor&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The procedure split the DMX_Werte of the channel 2 in 4 intervals and performs different assignments. The current value is checked so and the controls are adjusted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! DMXControl code&lt;br /&gt;
! Generic language variant&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;source lang=XML&amp;gt;&amp;lt;procedure name=&#039;GetColor&#039;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;source lang=C&amp;gt;Procedure GetColor( )&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
!if|{channel_2} &amp;amp;lt; 208| &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_color|&lt;br /&gt;
  {channel_2}$ &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_speed|0$ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
!if|({channel_2} &amp;amp;gt; 207) and  &lt;br /&gt;
({channel_2} &amp;amp;lt; 227)| &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_color|-1$ &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_speed|&lt;br /&gt;
  (226-{channel_2})$ &lt;br /&gt;
$ &lt;br /&gt;
!if|({channel_2} &amp;amp;gt; 226) and  &lt;br /&gt;
({channel_2} &amp;amp;lt; 246)| &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_color|-2$ &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_speed|&lt;br /&gt;
  ({channel_2}-227)$ &lt;br /&gt;
$ &lt;br /&gt;
!if|({channel_2} &amp;amp;gt; 245) and  &lt;br /&gt;
({channel_2} &amp;amp;lt; 256)| &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_color|-3$ &lt;br /&gt;
  !set_control|color_speed|&lt;br /&gt;
  ((255-{channel_2}) * 2)$&lt;br /&gt;
$ &lt;br /&gt;
$&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;source lang=C&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
begin &lt;br /&gt;
if channel_2 &amp;lt; 208 then&lt;br /&gt;
  color_color := channel_2; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  color_speed := 0; &lt;br /&gt;
(else)  &lt;br /&gt;
if (channel_2 &amp;gt; 207)  and  &lt;br /&gt;
(channel_2 &amp;lt; 227) then&lt;br /&gt;
  color_color := -1; &lt;br /&gt;
  color_speed := 226-channel_2; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(else)  &lt;br /&gt;
if (channel_2 &amp;gt; 226) and  &lt;br /&gt;
(channel_2 &amp;lt; 246) then&lt;br /&gt;
  color_color := -2; &lt;br /&gt;
  color_speed :=channel_2-227 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(else) &lt;br /&gt;
if (channel_2 &amp;gt; 245) and  &lt;br /&gt;
   (channel_2 &amp;lt; 256) then&lt;br /&gt;
  color_color := -3; &lt;br /&gt;
  color_speed := (255-channel_2) * 2; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;source lang=XML&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/procedure&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 280px&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;source lang=C&amp;gt;end&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Minvalue&#039; and &#039;maxvalue&#039; the control attributes are new in DMXControl 2.12 drop. By setting these attributes also the right double down entry is displayed if the current DMX value of value is different, but still in the range min/max value is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links and references==&lt;br /&gt;
Links&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Pack_And_Go_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Pack And Go Function&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  DDFCreator_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  DDFCreator&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: DDF_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Command_Box_DMXC2&amp;diff=3446</id>
		<title>Command Box DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Command_Box_DMXC2&amp;diff=3446"/>
		<updated>2013-12-19T20:15:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Controls */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.10.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;30.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
30.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = BeatTool_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = BeatTool&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Audioplayer_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Audioplayer&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The command box delivers a simple, open surface for the live business. With the command box DMXControl can be controled in all modules by button. So e.g. DMX channels can be set on predefined values of devices, start/stop effects, the audio player start/stop, changed attitudes of the sound Analyzer etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the command box can be started with a second screen and/or touch screen ideally to have direct control over DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the free programming of the individual buttons one, operation environment which is adapted to the claims of one&#039;s own and graphic can be made for DMXControl. This makes sense primarily on events because one must have opened only a window (command box window) and can control all actions from there openly. By use of banks up to 1000 buttons are possible for 20 at a matrix of 10 x 10 or 4000 buttons at a matrix of 20 x 20. The number of buttons is variably adjustable. With the mouse or about a direct input about the keyboard the number of buttons can be adjusted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAttention&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Adjusting the buttons with the mouse is limitedly on a matrix of 20 x 20. By a direct input also higher values can be entered. That it makes no more sense depending on monitor as of a certain size it can do at considerably higher values also to falls refrained come.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variable command box window can be adapted to the corresponding requirements in his size. The button are scaled so that they are distributed evenly on the window. Through this window has space also for other made on the monitor to itself ( e.g. Graphical view ). A text, a color, an icon and a corresponding order can be assigned to every badge (see fig. 1).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_commando_box_window.png|1|Design example of the command box|center|600px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Controls==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The checking box is located in the upper part of the command box window &amp;amp;laquo; Programming mode &amp;amp; raquo; (see) fig. 2, you can change with which between the programming mode and the User mode.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_commando_box_programming_mode.png|2|Checkbox to serve between&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Programming mode and User mode|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To cover button with commands, the command box must be switched over into the programming mode. By clicking on the checking box the input mask appears in the upper area (see fig. 3).&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_commando_box_button_programming.png|3|The input mask|center|600px}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAttention&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the live business the programming mode must be turned off, i.e. the using mode must be active!&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The matrix size of the command box can be adjusted in the input mask in the upper area, i. e. the number of button per line as well as the number of lines per bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A changing the matrix size additionally is possible. Changing the line count is relatively easy, only when changing the column number the button are thrown in a mess.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the button can be moved in the programming mode by &#039;&#039;Drag and Drop&#039;&#039;, one can the buttons then sort themselves again. When moving the buttons the button in front of which a black vertical line is is taken in the old place and inserted in the place before the button. All buttons between this move themselves, what is requiring habituation at the beginning of something. But if one has seen through the system, it gets simpler.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(To move the button, you have to move him up or down, to the left or right, it&#039;s sometimes a little bit sticky)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the button on right above &amp;amp;laquo; Reset button &amp;amp;raquo; an occupied command box button can be reseted (deleted), it is for this the corresponding button to select and then the button &amp;amp;laquo; Reset button &amp;amp;raquo; operating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The occupancy of the corresponding button is announced at the table after choice of a button. If the button isn&#039;t occupied yet, seems under button name becomes the corresponding button with his index number as well as the standard color gray and at module &#039;&#039;Deactivate&#039;&#039; shown .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;padding:20px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Button name:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || A name of one&#039;s own can be listed in the field button name by a click on the field for the button which then appears on the button afterward, too.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Color:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || By a click to the field color the color palette window in which one can select the color of the button opens.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 110px; text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Icon:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || At a click on the icon field a file browser in which one can select and load a corresponding graphic for the button opens. The file format is restricted to the following graphics: bmp; dib; gif; jpg. The size of the picture should amount to 64 x 64 pixels therefore be square.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || At the click to the field module a drop down list from which one can select one of the modules available in DMXControl opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The following modules can be selected:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Disabled:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;no module selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Audio:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Audiotrack:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Audio track player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BeatTool:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Beat Tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chasers:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Chaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Command line:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Command line.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Command box:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Command box.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cue libary:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Cue libary.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cue list:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Cue list.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Devices in the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DMX output:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module DMX output.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DMXIn remote:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module DMXIn remote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Group selection:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Group selection.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Joystick:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Joystick control.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Master:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Master.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Midi Remote:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Midi remote.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;OSC receiver:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module OSC receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sound Analyzer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Sound analyzer.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Submaster:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Submaster.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Textbook:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the module Textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Plugins which support a control by the command box also seem additional here. This shall exemplarily be called MadMaxOne plugin here.                             &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;padding:20px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 110px; text-align:right&amp;quot; | &amp;amp;nbsp; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || &#039;&#039;&#039;MadMaxOne Plug-In:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using command on the plugin MadMaxOne.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; |&#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || The corresponding functions of the module are selected by a click in this field be able to depending on select module, or the device to be mentioned.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || By a click in this field an appropriate channel for a device can be adjusted or depending on module and function a corresponding action can be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || At a click on the field flags a dropdown list with which the corresponding flags can be put or deleted opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The following flags can be selected:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode (T):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;With the T flag a button can be configured as on/off switch button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use specified value (O):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;With the O flag lets himself in, written down on the field, apply per cent value to the module/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ask for value (A):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;With the A flag a value written down more petition tightly on it can be applied to the module/device. At the click on the configured button an input window in which the value can be entered opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0 (I):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The handing over of a value of zero at not depressed button is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || By a click in this field a corresponding value can be deposited quickly for a device or a function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Both at &#039; &#039;“Using indicated value“&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;“Questioning on value“the entered value is a per cent value in the area of 0. 000% to 100. 000% &#039; &#039;. A input of values 0 to 255 or 0 to 65535 isn&#039;t possible here.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module commands==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Modul: &#039;&#039;&#039;Command box&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;device/function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Bank&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| A choice of this function there is the possibility of accessing the different banks (1-10) about the order in the command box.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Next&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The next bank selects. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Previous&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The previous bank selects. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Bank 1 to 10&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Direct choice of one of the ten banks. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Button&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| With the function button orders already made can be cloned in the command box or used in other modules.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Button name&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Name of the button which shall be used. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meaning of the &#039;&#039;Flags&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 35px&amp;quot;|  Flag&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| T&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Toggle mode&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the function&#039;s being set by the first call and being reset by the second call.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| O&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Used specified value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Used specified value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being assigned to the appropriate channel of the value in the openings&#039; value. This value isn&#039;t DMX value 0 to 255 but a per cent value 0. 000 to 100. 000% &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| A&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ask for value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ask for value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the opening at call of the order of an input window in which the per cent value can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| I&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ignore value 0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being ignored of a value of zero. Do you need at some orders to ensure a correct function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Chasers can be put on command box buttons by Drag &amp;amp; Drop.&lt;br /&gt;
* An on/off mode of the buttons is coupled to the flag toggle mode of the command. The buttons seem visually depressed until the next click here durably, too. &lt;br /&gt;
* In the programming mode the buttons can be moved by Drag &amp;amp; Drop. To this the button must be let off exactly between two buttons (there where the line appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You shall go exemplarily using the effect module into the possible attitude for select effect in this place. &amp;amp;laquo; Channel &amp;amp;raquo;, is come in to &amp;amp;laquo; flags &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; value &amp;amp;raquo; only on the entry fields &amp;amp;laquo; module &amp;amp;raquo;, &amp;amp;laquo; devices/function &amp;amp;raquo; since the entry fields &amp;amp;laquo; button name &amp;amp;raquo;, &amp;amp;laquo; color», and &amp;amp;laquo; icon &amp;amp;raquo; are individual input fields. You find a list of all possible attitudes above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Start the chaser !!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Stop the chaser !!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Start/Stop the chaser&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Start ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Stop ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Start/Stop&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -,-,-,- ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -,-,-,- ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || T,-,-,-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || - ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || - ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Set acceleration of chaser !!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Set intensity of chaser !!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot;| Chaser next step&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Module:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Chasers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected  ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Device/Function:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Selected &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Set acceleration ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Set intenstity ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; || Next step&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -,O,-,I ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -,O,A,- ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -,-,-,-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || 50 ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || - ||style=&amp;quot;text-align:right&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;Value:&#039;&#039;&#039; || -&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis |Text = The following points have to be taken into account at the above examples:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* A firm value of 50% is at the example command taken on &#039;&#039; set acceleration &#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The value is at the example command questioned by the user &#039;&#039; Set intensity &#039;&#039; over the query window. If the query flag (A flag) isn&#039;t shown, this is due to the column width of the openings &amp;amp;laquo; Flags &amp;amp;raquo;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The acceleration the flag if at &amp;amp;raquo; &#039;&#039;Ignor value 0&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;laquo; value isn&#039;t, set the acceleration remains only as long as indicated on this, how the button is pushed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The corresponding chaser must have been started before a &#039;&#039; chaser next step &#039;&#039;.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = BeatTool_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = BeatTool&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Audioplayer_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Audioplayer&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Kommandobox_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Foreword_DMXC2&amp;diff=3445</id>
		<title>Foreword DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Foreword_DMXC2&amp;diff=3445"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T20:14:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.05.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
20.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review and correction passed by ‎Djrocket&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Introduction_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:DMXC2_Manual_Foreword_Startscreen2.12.png | center | Picture 1: DMXControl 2 Startscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Welcome==&lt;br /&gt;
We introduce the freeware DMXControl 2. DMXControl 2 is a powerful and comprehensive software package for PC based control of your DMX lighting equipment. The project DMXControl can be obtained from the DMXControl website&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;DMXControl website&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DMXControl website:  http://www.dmxcontrol.de&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and is part of a charitable association DMXControl Projektes e. V.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;DMXControl Projektes e.V.&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DMXControl Projektes e.V. website:  http://www.dmxcontrol-projects.org&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual covers the operation of the individual parts of the software together with useful tips. Furthermore there are several Tutorials (here) around DMXControl at your disposal with step for step instructions and support from the  DMXControl forum&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;DMXControl Forum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DMXControl Forum:  http://www.dmxcontrol.de/forum&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; for requests and suggestions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This manual is aimed both at beginners using DMX software for the first time and advanced users who just need help with certain functions. The individual program modules of DMXControl 2 are described in the front part of the manual, with detailed descriptions of the module operation. Articles in the back of the manual relate to popular Plugins, a glossary and list of DMX controllers / dongles supported by DMXControl 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure and Conventions==&lt;br /&gt;
The manual of DMXControl 2 is designed to be read like a book so that you can scroll through the individual chapters. Each  article has navigation bars for easy navigating and reviewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:DMXC2_Manual_Vorwort_Navigationsleiste.png | miniature | center | 640px | Pic 2: Navigation bar with closed chapter overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore the navigation bars provide an expanding view of the chapters with links to the corresponding articles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:DMXC2_Manual_Vorwort_Steuerungsleiste.png | miniature | center | 640px | Picture 3: Navigation bar with expanded chapter overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles have a uniform layout with a view to providing clear and concise information . Each article begins with a short review of the function of the module and how it can be used. A more detailed explanation of the module follows, with useful tips to speed up the learning process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All buttons, menu items and window names use following scheme: &amp;amp;laquo;Text&amp;amp;raquo;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The flags of the commands as well are represented as follows in the text: &amp;amp;laquo;&#039;&#039;Flag&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;raquo;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
File and list paths are stressed by a non-proportional document in apostrophes: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;...\DMXControl\DMXControl.exe&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single notes, warnings and references are emphasized with special boxes :&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint |Text = Useful notes and more detailed information}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxImportant  |Text = Notes on important program functions.}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAttention  |Text = Very important notes which can lead to malfunctions of DMXControl 2}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxAdvanced |Text = References to third partly information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We welcome constructive suggestions and notes regarding the software and manual with a view to improving these further. Suggestions for improvements to the software can be entered in the DMXControl forum&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;DMXControl Forum&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;. You can send these suggestions to the DMXControl bug tracking system&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;DMXControl-Bugtracker: http://www.dmxcontrol.de/bugtracker&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; also as a request with the broad consent from. Please use the &amp;quot;Handbuch DMXC2&amp;quot; area for remarks about the manual in the bug tracking system&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bugtracker (manual area): http://www.dmxcontrol.de/flyspray/index.php?project=7&amp;amp;do=index&amp;amp;switch=1&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. Even though the bug tracking system is in german you can send suggestions in english.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you have a lot of fun with DMXControl 2 and hope that it allows you to get closer to perfecting that &#039;perfect&#039; Lightshow . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxImportant  |Text = We still look for support of native speakers for the English Wiki, because we are a German project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you interested to cooperated with us, you can send us a request under Info@DMXControl.de[[mailto:Info@DMXControl.de|Info@DMXControl.de]].}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your DMXControl team&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual authors==&lt;br /&gt;
===Publisher===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl Projects e.V.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Beuthener Straße 8b&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
13125 Berlin Germany&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authors===&lt;br /&gt;
*Frank Burghardt&lt;br /&gt;
*Jens-Peter Kühn&lt;br /&gt;
*Julien Mintenbeck&lt;br /&gt;
*Uwe Prenner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Translators===&lt;br /&gt;
*Ron Uccellini&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links and References==&lt;br /&gt;
Links&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Introduction_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwort_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Introduction_DMXC2&amp;diff=3444</id>
		<title>Introduction DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Introduction_DMXC2&amp;diff=3444"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T20:13:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.05.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.10.2013: in progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review and correction passed by  ‎Djrocket&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Foreword_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Foreword&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
With DMXControl 2 you get a program for the arrangement and control of your light show. You can control DMX equipment like a dimmer, LED PAR Can or Moving Heads from the computer with this program. DMXControl 2 has two special program modules which can be used for many different fields of application. From private parties to fully computer-controlled Christmas Lighting, DMXControl 2 has simple and complex features to suit discotheques or at events like choir, theater or musicals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important features==&lt;br /&gt;
The most important performance features of DMXControl 2 are: &lt;br /&gt;
*(XP, Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8), runs on different Windows versions &lt;br /&gt;
*support 1024 output channels (at 2 interfaces with 512 channels) and 512 input channels &lt;br /&gt;
*support the DMX512 protocol for different DMX interfaces is () a current list available on the project home page [1] &lt;br /&gt;
* supports the ArtNet protocol and different interfaces like MIDI, DMX-in (if supported by the DMX interface)  &lt;br /&gt;
*stores configurations, elements and options as part of a Project &lt;br /&gt;
*provides a graphical representation of the lighting configuration (stage) &lt;br /&gt;
*different sound to Light syncronisation options &lt;br /&gt;
*selectable special feature options for complex lights like moving heads and scanners &lt;br /&gt;
*scheduler for time controlled events, such as a certain date, time, duration and repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
*script and scene lists for the control of theatre and musical events &lt;br /&gt;
*open interfaces for expansion of the program functionality (OSC, serial interface, TCP-IP)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==License==&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl 2 is a freeware project which means you can use the program free of cost for your own use. If you would like to support the project financially, you can send DMXControl Projects e. V. a donation on our organization website&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;DMXControl Projects e.V.: http://www.dmxcontrol-projects.org/&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The project isn&#039;t, however, an OpenSource project, and the source code of the program is not available publicly. Publication of the source code would lead to a confused mass as in the case with many OpenSource projects, with poor version control being a significant disadvantage. To prevent this, the source code of DMXControl 2 is accessible only to the programming team. This approach leads to a joined up development team producing and reliable good quality software. A modular construction with many different interfaces for Plugins is a feature of the software. In addition, the programming team is open to offers of help to increase their capabilities in the long run. If you are seriously interested in improving DMXControl 2 further, please  contact us. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl&#039;s developers are always happy to receive feedback to further develop the program for different event types. You can send requests and ideas here in the DMXControl Wiki and also in the DMXControl forum&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;DMXControl Forum: http://www.dmxcontrol.de/forum/&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; with other users from the exchange community.&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links and references==&lt;br /&gt;
Links&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Foreword_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Foreword&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Einleitung_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3443</id>
		<title>Control center DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3443"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T20:12:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
23.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review and correction passed by ‎Djrocket&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_program_icon.png|1|DMXControl&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Program icon|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
Once DMXControl starts by double clicking the program icon, (see figure 1) DMXControl&#039;s control center opens (see figure 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This window give the operator easy access to all the main modules, tools and configurations of DMXControl. In addition, other configuration setting are available with the menu items &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Configuration &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a status line which displays the path and the file of the loaded project and also the approximate load of DMX Control&#039;s internal message system on the lower window edge window. In addition, the date, the current system time and the version number are also shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png|2|The control center of DMXControl|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* to open, save and quit your show (menue &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to get all your tools from DMXControl (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to [[Program_settings_DMXC2|setup]] your system (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Settings &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to call the support funktions  (menue &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Control elements==&lt;br /&gt;
===The FILE Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Windows items are located in the FILE menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-new.png|Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| New project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Start a new project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-open.png|Öffnen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open an existing project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-save.png|Speichern]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| CTRL+S&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Overwrites the currently selected project. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project as...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Save the project in a selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pack &amp;amp; Go...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Archiving a complete project, e.g. to move it to a new or second computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|(see chapter 31)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Exit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Quits DMXControl and displays the usual safety and exit queries.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WINDOW Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Window&#039; menu includes many important items to DMXControl, Any installed Plugins are also shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
====First Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_channel_overview.png|Channel overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Channel overview&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the channel overview window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Channel_overview_DMXC2|(see chapter 8)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Devices&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the device window for managing your devices.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-graphical_view.png|Graphical_view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the graphical view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Group selection&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the group selection window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2#Group_devices|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Second Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_Icon-BeatTool.png|BeatTool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| BeatTool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the BeatTool window for sound-to-light-control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[BeatTool_DMXC2|(see chapter 15)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command line&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command line window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[command_line_DMXC2|(see chapter 20)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Command_box.png|Kommandobox]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command Box&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Command_Box_DMXC2|(see chapter 16)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXIn remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the DMXIn remote control for activating the DMXIn remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup of the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Midi remote control for activating the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Keyboard control window for activating the Keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Master.png|Master]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Master&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the master window with the master fader.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Master_DMXC2|(see chapter 13)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| PDA remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for PDA setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[PDA_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 24)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the scheduler window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scheduler_DMXC2|(see chapter 21)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Third Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-audio_player.png|Audio player]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Audio player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the audio player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Audioplayer_DMXC2|(see chapter 17)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-chasers_tool.png|Chasers Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Chasers Tool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the chasers tool window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Chasers_tool_DMXC2|(see chapter 11)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-cue_list.png|Szenenliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Cue List&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue List window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Cue_list_DMXC2|(see chapter 10)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-sound_analyzer.png|Sound analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Sound analyzer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the sound analyzer window for sound-to-light setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Sound_analyzer_DMXC2|(see chapter 14)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Submaster.png|Submaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Submaster&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the submaster window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Submaster_DMXC2|(see chapter 12)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Textbook.png|Textbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Textbook&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the textbook window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Textbook_DMXC2|(see chapter 19)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Timecode player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the timecode player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Timecode_player_DMXC2|(see chapter 18)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fourth Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show cue libary&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+B&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue libary window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scenes_DMXC2|(see chapter 9)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Edit view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+E&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Hides menu items for live operating.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Fetching all windows on the primary desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If you work with several monitors, it can happen on the return to the single monitor mode that windows are still on the now virtual monitor. With this function, you can get missing windows back to your primary monitor. It is premiss that the window is open.  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The SETTINGS Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which serve the configuration of DMXControl and his modules are in the menu configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Output plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the output plugins.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Output_plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 7)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;d&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the plugins for advance functions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 30)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Program settings...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the program settings window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Program_settings_DMXC2|(see chapter 29)]] &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMX-In remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the DMX-In remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;|Color lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the color lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Gobo lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the gobo lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Shape editor...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window of the shape editor for the motion cue.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Shape_editor_DMXC2|(see chapter 23)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Englisch&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Deutsch&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Language selection for DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Enable experimental tools&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If this menu item is select, then the program parts which weren&#039;t tested substantially yet and are in the beta stage still appear, too. No experimental program parts are integratedly in the 2.12 at the moment, only some of Plugins need this point so that they are shown in. (e. g. the Plugin BeatDetection) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The HELP &amp;quot;?&amp;quot; Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which help you with DMXControl&#039;s operation are in the menu help.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open PDF-manual&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer. The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open online manual &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The english PDF manual is not yet supported, just wait until the translation of the Wiki is finished.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl website&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open the browser on the computer and call the DMXControl website.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl forum&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens your favorit browser on the computer and calls the DMXControl forum, you can receive here here online help of the community.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| About&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the about window, where you can see several informations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Important informations are the relase and build nummber for bug descriptions on the bug tracker or the forum. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show Debug Output&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens a window with informations for debuging in case of bug tracking. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other controls in the control center===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Blackout.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the DMX value output for all channels will be set to 0. The next push restores all DMX values back again. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Freeze.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the output will freeze, this means that the last DMX values will distributed. Any change of DMX values during the freeze will not send to the output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There is also a second freeze button in the graphical view which only there has an effect.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Audio_cue.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Audio playback&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| An audio cue which is running can be stopped early with this button or one of the 16 audio cues can be manipulated over the drop down menu.   &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General controls in DMXControl===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_add.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Add&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button adds is contained in almost all windows in DMXControl and is used for adding new Cues, lists and effects and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_delete.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Delete&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;|If there is a button add, there is also a button delete to purge entry.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_copy.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button copy is placed in in several places and used to copy cues and effects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_rename.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Rename&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button can be used to rename several entrys.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-up.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift up&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys up in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-down.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift down&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys down in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Edit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to edit cues, effcts and lists in DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_reset.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The reset button will set the DMX output from the window to default DMX output.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_play.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Start&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button appears in all places where a sequence can be started from cues for the expiry the start.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module commands==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module commands refers essentially to the button &#039;&#039;blackout&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;freeze&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Module: &#039;&#039;&#039;DMX-Output&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;Device/Function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; inverted the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view. &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; invertst the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meaning of the &#039;&#039;Flags&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 35px&amp;quot;|  Flag&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| T&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Toggle mode&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the function&#039;s being set by the first call and being reset by the second call.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| O&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Used specified value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Used specified value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being assigned to the appropriate channel of the value in the openings&#039; value. This value isn&#039;t DMX value 0 to 255 but a per cent value 0. 000 to 100. 000% &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| A&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ask for value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ask for value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the opening at call of the order of an input window in which the per cent value can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| I&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ignore value 0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being ignored of a value of zero. Do you need at some orders to ensure a correct function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be on the safe side, Projects should regularly be stored during the construction phase under another name (e.g. Yourproject 1,2,3,4,5 etc.). This process will allow you to go back to an older version if necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
The experimental program items are only seen in the menu when the experimental tools are enabled in the SETTINGS menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Steuerzentrum DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Installation_DMXC2&amp;diff=3442</id>
		<title>Installation DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Installation_DMXC2&amp;diff=3442"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T20:12:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.05.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
22.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review and correction passed by  ‎Djrocket&#039;&#039;&#039;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Introduction_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Control_center_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Control center&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe how to install DMXControl 2. This covers the standard installation. You will find the current Installer in the download area of the home page of DMXControl&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;DMXControl website, downloadarea: http://www.dmxcontrol.de/downloads/software.html&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl also supports sound to Light control and to use this function the MP3 player Winamp must be installed on the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxImportant&lt;br /&gt;
| Text = If Winamp isn&#039;t installed, the two communication files &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;DMXControl.ape&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;DMXControl.avs&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; are copied into the DMXControl contents directory. If Winamp should be installed, then the two files are copied at the installation into the Winamp Plugin list. If Winamp is installed afterwards, these two files must be copied by Winamp into the Plugin list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Users of Windows Vista==&lt;br /&gt;
For Operating Systems after XP, Microsoft made some changes in their subsequent operating systems which which will influence DMXControl&#039;s operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User accounts control system===&lt;br /&gt;
With Windows Vista, Microsoft introduced their &#039;User Accounts Control System&#039; by which nearly all programs work with restricted rights by default, unless the user particularly agrees to extended rights (Administrator Rights). Since DMXControl 2 executes actions when starting and ending which need administrator rights, this can lead to DMXControl 2 producing error messages during startup. To resolve this issue, use the file PluginAdministrator.exe, located in the main DMXControl installation folder and use this to view the plugins, check all plugin-entries, once this is done no more error messages will appear during start-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changed folder structure===&lt;br /&gt;
Since Windows Vista the folder structure in comparison with Windows XP is also different. Now the DMXControl projects are not stored by default in the DMXControl tool folder, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C:\Users\[Username]\Dokuments\DMXControl-Projekte&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. To deal with this, both the paths for Windows XP and Windows Vista are therefore referenced in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
The following screenshots describe the installation process step by step. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Language===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Languageselect.png|1|The language selection|272px|left}} || The installation assistant starts directly with the choice of the installation language. The dialog is preselected to the language set as your default language in the operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Welcome===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Welcome.png|2|The welcome dialog|450px|left}} || You are informed on this screen which software you are installing. With a click on the button &amp;amp;laquo; Next &amp;amp;raquo;, you will then see the license dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===License===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_License.png|3|The license authentication window|450px|left}} || The end-user license is shown on the license dialog by DMXControl in two languages. Into this you are requested to accept the terms of the license. Among other things the licence describes what you can and cannot do as a user of the software. You must accept the license agreement by a clicking on the button &amp;amp;laquo; Accept &amp;amp;raquo;. By agreeing to these terms you accept the legal rules even though this is free software.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install EasyView?===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_3DEasyView.png|4|3D-Easy View Installation request|450px|left}} || Once the license agreement the question is accepted, you are asked if the 3D-Visualizer Magic EasyView shall be installed? The Visualizer is a very useful tool where one prepares the shows and layouts of the stage. xxxxxx ??? About as much 3D energy as this one the Dektop at home has, can&#039;t be renounced the 3D representation also safely on the live laptop computer.xxxxx???&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Destination directory===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_storage_location.png|5|Choice storage location|450px|left}} || At the next step you select the target installation directory that DMXControl 2 will use. The default path is already suggested and, if you don&#039;t have any special requirements, use this one safely. The suggested directory will vary depending on the operating system, version and language. Under a German 32 bit Windows (XP, Vista, 7) it is the suggestion &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C:\Programme\DMXControl&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and at the English 32 bit version is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C:\Program Files&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. At a 64 bit Windows the suggestions are, however &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C:\Programme (x86)&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C:\Program Files (X86)&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Program features===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Components.png|6|Choice of the components to be installed|450px|left}} || You are now presented with a detailed choice of the installation items. With the standard installation, all features of the software are selected and you can move directly to the next step. If you wish to carry out an installation with a slimmed down version, on another system for instance, you can omit certain features as you wish. Since DMXControl 2 does not occupy much hard disk space, the simplest variant is the complete installation.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start menu directory===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_start_menue.png|7|Entry in the start menu.|450px|left}} || Lastly, you will asked for the name for the entry in the start menu. The standard suggestion is &#039;&#039;&#039;DMXControl&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Install.png|8|Install progress|450px|left}} || The selected parts of the software are decompressed and installed on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Download EasyView (optional)===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_EasyViewDownload.png|9|Download of Easy View|450px|left}} || If the option for the EasyView installation was selected, the download of the EasyView installation program starts now.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation EasyView (optional)===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_EasyViewInstallation.png|10|Installation of Easy View|450px|left}} || The installation of EasyView starts completely automatically and does not need any user input.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation EasyView driver (optional)===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_EasyViewWelcome.png|11|Driver installation for Easy View|450px|left}} || During the installation of EasyView, drivers are installed into the system. The installation dialog provided by Windows will show for device drivers. This can started simply by pressing the &amp;amp;laquo; Next &amp;amp;raquo; button.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install all EasyView drivers (optional)===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Install_EasyViewReady.png|12|Conclusion of the Easy View installation|450px|left}} || If the drivers are installed successfully, this part can be completed and you will return to the installation assistant of EasyView and then to the DMXControl 2 installation.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation progress===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Complete.png|13|Complete installation|450px|left}} || You have the option of looking at the summary of the installation at the end of the process including where EasyView was installed. This path is important if you need to integrate additional Fixtures in EasyView, so you should make a note of the path for future use.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start DMXControl===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_Installation_Completed.png|14|Installation completed|450px|left}} |} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the installation has finished you have the opportunity to start DMXControl, or retun to Windows without starting the program.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links and References==&lt;br /&gt;
Links&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Introduction_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Control_center_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Control center&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Installation_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3441</id>
		<title>Control center DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Control_center_DMXC2&amp;diff=3441"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T20:10:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|20.5.2013: JKuehn: create the article page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.10.2013: work-in-progress by UPrenner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
23.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Review passed by  ‎Djrocket&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_program_icon.png|1|DMXControl&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Program icon|right}}&lt;br /&gt;
Once DMXControl starts by double clicking the program icon, (see figure 1) DMXControl&#039;s control center opens (see figure 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This window give the operator easy access to all the main modules, tools and configurations of DMXControl. In addition, other configuration setting are available with the menu items &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo; &amp;amp;laquo; Configuration &amp;amp;raquo; and &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a status line which displays the path and the file of the loaded project and also the approximate load of DMX Control&#039;s internal message system on the lower window edge window. In addition, the date, the current system time and the version number are also shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_control_center_window.png|2|The control center of DMXControl|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* to open, save and quit your show (menue &amp;amp;laquo; File &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to get all your tools from DMXControl (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Window &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to [[Program_settings_DMXC2|setup]] your system (menue &amp;amp;laquo; Settings &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
* to call the support funktions  (menue &amp;amp;laquo; ? &amp;amp;raquo;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Control elements==&lt;br /&gt;
===The FILE Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Windows items are located in the FILE menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-new.png|Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| New project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Start a new project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-open.png|Öffnen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open project...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open an existing project.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-save.png|Speichern]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| CTRL+S&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Overwrites the currently selected project. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Save project as...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Save the project in a selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Pack &amp;amp; Go...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Archiving a complete project, e.g. to move it to a new or second computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|(see chapter 31)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Exit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Quits DMXControl and displays the usual safety and exit queries.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WINDOW Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Window&#039; menu includes many important items to DMXControl, Any installed Plugins are also shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
====First Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_channel_overview.png|Channel overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Channel overview&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the channel overview window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Channel_overview_DMXC2|(see chapter 8)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Devices&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the device window for managing your devices.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-graphical_view.png|Graphical_view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the graphical view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Group selection&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the group selection window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Graphical_view_DMXC2#Group_devices|(see chapter 5)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Second Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_Icon-BeatTool.png|BeatTool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| BeatTool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the BeatTool window for sound-to-light-control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[BeatTool_DMXC2|(see chapter 15)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command line&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command line window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[command_line_DMXC2|(see chapter 20)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Command_box.png|Kommandobox]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Command Box&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the command box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Command_Box_DMXC2|(see chapter 16)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXIn remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the DMXIn remote control for activating the DMXIn remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup of the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Midi remote control for activating the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the Keyboard control window for activating the Keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Master.png|Master]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Master&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the master window with the master fader.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Master_DMXC2|(see chapter 13)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| PDA remote control&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for PDA setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[PDA_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 24)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the scheduler window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scheduler_DMXC2|(see chapter 21)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Third Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-audio_player.png|Audio player]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Audio player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the audio player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Audioplayer_DMXC2|(see chapter 17)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-chasers_tool.png|Chasers Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Chasers Tool&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the chasers tool window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Chasers_tool_DMXC2|(see chapter 11)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-cue_list.png|Szenenliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Cue List&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue List window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Cue_list_DMXC2|(see chapter 10)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-sound_analyzer.png|Sound analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Sound analyzer&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the sound analyzer window for sound-to-light setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Sound_analyzer_DMXC2|(see chapter 14)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Submaster.png|Submaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Submaster&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the submaster window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Submaster_DMXC2|(see chapter 12)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Textbook.png|Textbook]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Textbook&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the textbook window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Textbook_DMXC2|(see chapter 19)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Timecode player&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the timecode player window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Timecode_player_DMXC2|(see chapter 18)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fourth Section====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show cue libary&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+B&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the cue libary window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Scenes_DMXC2|(see chapter 9)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Edit view&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| STRG+E&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Hides menu items for live operating.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Fetching all windows on the primary desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If you work with several monitors, it can happen on the return to the single monitor mode that windows are still on the now virtual monitor. With this function, you can get missing windows back to your primary monitor. It is premiss that the window is open.  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The SETTINGS Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which serve the configuration of DMXControl and his modules are in the menu configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Output plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the output plugins.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Output_plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 7)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;d&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Plugins..&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for setup and configure the plugins for advance functions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Plugins_DMXC2|(see chapter 30)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Program settings...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the program settings window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Program_settings_DMXC2|(see chapter 29)]] &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Midi remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the Midi remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[MIDI_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 27)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMX-In remote control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the DMX-In remote control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[DMXIn_remote_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 28)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Joystick control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the joystick control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Joystick_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 26)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Keyboard control...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for configure the keyboard control.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Keyboard_control_DMXC2|(see chapter 25)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;|Color lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the color lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Gobo lists...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window for definition the gobo lists.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Devices_DMXC2#Farb-_und_Gobolisten|(see chapter 6)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Shape editor...&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the window of the shape editor for the motion cue.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Shape_editor_DMXC2|(see chapter 23)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Englisch&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Deutsch&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Language selection for DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Enable experimental tools&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| If this menu item is select, then the program parts which weren&#039;t tested substantially yet and are in the beta stage still appear, too. No experimental program parts are integratedly in the 2.12 at the moment, only some of Plugins need this point so that they are shown in. (e. g. the Plugin BeatDetection) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The HELP &amp;quot;?&amp;quot; Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
The menu items which help you with DMXControl&#039;s operation are in the menu help.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Menue item &lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open PDF-manual&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer. The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Open online manual &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| This manual as PDF opens on the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The PDF manual is updated in regular distances, a current version is on the home page for the download and simply needs to be copied only into the DMXControl contents directory.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The english PDF manual is not yet supported, just wait until the translation of the Wiki is finished.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl website&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Open the browser on the computer and call the DMXControl website.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| DMXControl forum&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens your favorit browser on the computer and calls the DMXControl forum, you can receive here here online help of the community.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| About&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens the about window, where you can see several informations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Important informations are the relase and build nummber for bug descriptions on the bug tracker or the forum. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-space.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 175px&amp;quot;| Show Debug Output&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 65px; text-align: center&amp;quot;| n.a.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 310px&amp;quot;| Opens a window with informations for debuging in case of bug tracking. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other controls in the control center===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Blackout.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the DMX value output for all channels will be set to 0. The next push restores all DMX values back again. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Freeze.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| Push this icon once, the output will freeze, this means that the last DMX values will distributed. Any change of DMX values during the freeze will not send to the output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There is also a second freeze button in the graphical view which only there has an effect.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_icon-Audio_cue.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px&amp;quot;| Audio playback&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| An audio cue which is running can be stopped early with this button or one of the 16 audio cues can be manipulated over the drop down menu.   &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General controls in DMXControl===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Icon&lt;br /&gt;
! Name&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_add.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Add&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button adds is contained in almost all windows in DMXControl and is used for adding new Cues, lists and effects and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_delete.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Delete&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;|If there is a button add, there is also a button delete to purge entry.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_copy.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button copy is placed in in several places and used to copy cues and effects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_rename.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Rename&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button can be used to rename several entrys.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-up.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift up&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys up in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_arrow-down.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Shift down&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to drag entrys down in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Edit&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| This button is used to edit cues, effcts and lists in DMXControl.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_reset.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Reset&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The reset button will set the DMX output from the window to default DMX output.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 50px; text-align:center; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| [[File:DMXC2_Manual_control_center_button_play.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 170px; vertical-align:middle&amp;quot;| Start&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 380px&amp;quot;| The button appears in all places where a sequence can be started from cues for the expiry the start.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module commands==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module commands refers essentially to the button &#039;&#039;blackout&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;freeze&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Module: &#039;&#039;&#039;DMX-Output&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Meaning from &#039;&#039;Device/Function&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Channel&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Device/Function &lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Channel&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Blackout&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view.&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; inverted the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Blackout&#039;&#039;-Funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Freeze&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| The &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; command refers to the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039; icon in the control center and in the graphical view. &lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Toggle&#039;&#039; invertst the momentary behaviour of the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| On&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; activate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 100px&amp;quot;| Off&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;width: 200px&amp;quot;| The command &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; deactivate the &#039;&#039;Freeze&#039;&#039;-funktion. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meaning of the &#039;&#039;Flags&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable centered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 35px&amp;quot;|  Flag&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| T&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Toggle mode&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Toggle mode&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the function&#039;s being set by the first call and being reset by the second call.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| O&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Used specified value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Used specified value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being assigned to the appropriate channel of the value in the openings&#039; value. This value isn&#039;t DMX value 0 to 255 but a per cent value 0. 000 to 100. 000% &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| A&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ask for value&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ask for value&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the opening at call of the order of an input window in which the per cent value can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 35px; text-align:center&amp;quot;| I&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 105px&amp;quot;| Ignore value 0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 460px&amp;quot;| The Flag &amp;amp;raquo;&#039;&#039;Ignore value 0&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;laquo; result in the being ignored of a value of zero. Do you need at some orders to ensure a correct function.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tip(s)==  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be on the safe side, Projects should regularly be stored during the construction phase under another name (e.g. Yourproject 1,2,3,4,5 etc.). This process will allow you to go back to an older version if necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
The experimental program items are only seen in the menu when the experimental tools are enabled in the SETTINGS menu.&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Installation_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Installation&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards = Graphical_view_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards = Graphical view&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Steuerzentrum DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Automatic_creating_of_a_running_light&amp;diff=3438</id>
		<title>Automatic creating of a running light</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Automatic_creating_of_a_running_light&amp;diff=3438"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T13:29:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Szenengenerator  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab Version 2.11 enthält DMXControl einen Szenengenerator/Lauflichtgenerator. Dies ist ein Assistent, der es ermöglicht, in 3 Schritten verschiedene Grundszenen für Geräte zu erzeugen. Überall, wo eine Szene über das grüne Plus-Zeichen erzeugt werden kann, wird nun auch im Kontext-Menü (rechte Maustaste) der Eintrag &amp;quot;Automatisch erzeugt - Aus DDF&amp;quot; angeboten. Wird der Szenengenerator aus der Szenenliste aufgerufen, werden die generierten Schritte als Einzelszenen in die Szenenliste eingetragen. Alle generierten Szenen erscheinen auch in der Szenenbibliothek. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_AutomatischeSzenen.png|1|Automatische Szenenerstellung|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bedienung  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Bedienung wird anhand der Demoprojekt-Konfiguration gezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt1.png|2|Szenengenerator Schritt 1}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus der Liste wird das Gerät ausgewählt, für das Szenen generiert werden sollen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt2.png|3|Szenengenerator Schritt 2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird die Eigenschaft gewählt. Im rechten Fenster kann man einen oder mehrere Werte auswählen, für die man später (Einzel-)Szenen haben will. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt3.png|4|Szenengenerator Schritt 3}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schliesslich kann man noch weitere Geräte des gleichen Typs wählen. Die generierten Szenen betreffen dann alle ausgewählten Geräte. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ergebnis&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenbibliothekErgebnis.png|5|Szenengenerator Ergebnis}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle generierten Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek unter der Kategorie &amp;quot;automatisch erzeugt&amp;quot; abgelegt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lauflicht-Generator  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab Version 2.12 enthält DMXControl einen Lauflichtgenerator. Dies ist ein Assistent, der es ermöglicht in 3 Schritten verschiedene Muster des Lauflichts zu erzeugen. Überall, wo eine Szene über das grüne Plus-Zeichen erzeugt werden kann, wird nun auch im Kontext-Menü (rechte Maustaste) der Eintrag &amp;quot;Automatisch erzeugt -&amp;amp;gt; Lauflicht&amp;quot; angeboten. Wird der Lauflichtgenerator aus der Szenenliste aufgerufen, werden die Schritte des LAuflichts als Einzelszenen in die Szenenliste eingetragen. Wird der Lauflichtgenerator aus dem Effektsequenzer aufgerufen, wird ein neuer Effekt erzeugt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bedienung  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Bedienung wird anhand der Demoprojekt-Konfiguration gezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt1.png|6|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 1}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus der Liste werden die Geräte ausgewählt, die in das Lauflicht einbezogen werden sollen.Achtung:&amp;amp;nbsp;Es werden nur Dimmerkanäle angezeigt, daher bei den DDFs bitte auf den Typ &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; der Lauflichtkanäle achten, auch wenn z.B. ein Switchpack verwendet wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt2.png|7|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird das Muster gewählt. Dieses kann in der Vorschau geprüft werden. Es kann die Grundgeschwindigkeit des Lauflichts eingestellt werden. Diese kann später, z.B. im Effektsequenzer modifiziert werde. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt3.png|8|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 3}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schliesslich wird die Helligkeit voreingestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ergebnis&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_EffektsequenzerErgebnis.png|9|Lauflichtgenerator Ergebnis}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bild zeigt den automatisch generierten Effekt &amp;quot;Lauflicht Muster 2&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Tutorials_DMXControl_2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Automatic_creating_of_a_running_light&amp;diff=3437</id>
		<title>Automatic creating of a running light</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Automatic_creating_of_a_running_light&amp;diff=3437"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T13:27:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: Created page with &amp;quot;== Szenengenerator  ==  Ab Version 2.11 enthält DMXControl einen Szenengenerator/Lauflichtgenerator. Dies ist ein Assistent, der es ermöglicht, in 3 Schritten verschiedene G...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Szenengenerator  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab Version 2.11 enthält DMXControl einen Szenengenerator/Lauflichtgenerator. Dies ist ein Assistent, der es ermöglicht, in 3 Schritten verschiedene Grundszenen für Geräte zu erzeugen. Überall, wo eine Szene über das grüne Plus-Zeichen erzeugt werden kann, wird nun auch im Kontext-Menü (rechte Maustaste) der Eintrag &amp;quot;Automatisch erzeugt - Aus DDF&amp;quot; angeboten. Wird der Szenengenerator aus der Szenenliste aufgerufen, werden die generierten Schritte als Einzelszenen in die Szenenliste eingetragen. Alle generierten Szenen erscheinen auch in der Szenenbibliothek. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_AutomatischeSzenen.png|1|Automatische Szenenerstellung|center}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bedienung  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Bedienung wird anhand der Demoprojekt-Konfiguration gezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt1.png|2|Szenengenerator Schritt 1}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus der Liste wird das Gerät ausgewählt, für das Szenen generiert werden sollen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt2.png|3|Szenengenerator Schritt 2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird die Eigenschaft gewählt. Im rechten Fenster kann man einen oder mehrere Werte auswählen, für die man später (Einzel-)Szenen haben will. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenGeneratorSchritt3.png|4|Szenengenerator Schritt 3}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schliesslich kann man noch weitere Geräte des gleichen Typs wählen. Die generierten Szenen betreffen dann alle ausgewählten Geräte. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ergebnis&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_SzenenbibliothekErgebnis.png|5|Szenengenerator Ergebnis}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle generierten Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek unter der Kategorie &amp;quot;automatisch erzeugt&amp;quot; abgelegt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lauflicht-Generator  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab Version 2.12 enthält DMXControl einen Lauflichtgenerator. Dies ist ein Assistent, der es ermöglicht in 3 Schritten verschiedene Muster des Lauflichts zu erzeugen. Überall, wo eine Szene über das grüne Plus-Zeichen erzeugt werden kann, wird nun auch im Kontext-Menü (rechte Maustaste) der Eintrag &amp;quot;Automatisch erzeugt -&amp;amp;gt; Lauflicht&amp;quot; angeboten. Wird der Lauflichtgenerator aus der Szenenliste aufgerufen, werden die Schritte des LAuflichts als Einzelszenen in die Szenenliste eingetragen. Wird der Lauflichtgenerator aus dem Effektsequenzer aufgerufen, wird ein neuer Effekt erzeugt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bedienung  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Bedienung wird anhand der Demoprojekt-Konfiguration gezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt1.png|6|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 1}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus der Liste werden die Geräte ausgewählt, die in das Lauflicht einbezogen werden sollen.Achtung:&amp;amp;nbsp;Es werden nur Dimmerkanäle angezeigt, daher bei den DDFs bitte auf den Typ &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; der Lauflichtkanäle achten, auch wenn z.B. ein Switchpack verwendet wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt2.png|7|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird das Muster gewählt. Dieses kann in der Vorschau geprüft werden. Es kann die Grundgeschwindigkeit des Lauflichts eingestellt werden. Diese kann später, z.B. im Effektsequenzer modifiziert werde. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Schritt 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_LauflichtGeneratorSchritt3.png|8|Lauflichtgenerator Schritt 3}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schliesslich wird die Helligkeit voreingestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ergebnis&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_EffektsequenzerErgebnis.png|9|Lauflichtgenerator Ergebnis}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bild zeigt den automatisch generierten Effekt &amp;quot;Lauflicht Muster 2&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Tutorials DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3433</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3433"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T06:00:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page 16.11.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
17.11.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] [[#C|C]] [[#D|D]] E [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N [[#O|O]] [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] [[#T|T]] U V W X Y Z&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3432</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3432"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:58:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] [[#C|C]] [[#D|D]] E [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N [[#O|O]] [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] [[#T|T]] U V W X Y Z&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3431</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3431"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:55:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3430</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3430"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:54:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3429</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3429"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:53:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3428</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3428"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:51:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3427</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3427"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:50:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== O ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3426</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3426"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:49:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3425</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3425"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:48:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3424</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3424"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:47:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Cue list */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3423</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3423"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:47:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Ü */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== T ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3422</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3422"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:46:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Überblendpunkt */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition point ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; use point&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is used when blending between two cues. While the channels with the attribute &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade = yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (dimmer) are soft fade, the other channels (shutter, gobo wheel) must be set at a point abruptly to a new value. The insertion point is the location on the timeline represents (between 0 and 100% of the fade), the switching happens. In this way, gobos can be changed either at the beginning or at the end of the fade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3421</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3421"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:44:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Cue */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_cue_list_newcue.png|3|Create a new cue|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3420</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3420"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:43:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* S */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spectrum===&lt;br /&gt;
Decomposition of the frequency band of an audio file in different intervals. All intervals together form the spectrum. DMXControl in the intervals can be assigned to channels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start adresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Each physical device in a DMX chain has a so called starting or base address. This is set on the device itself, ideally it is identical with the start ardress the [[#Device|device]] in DMXControl. This address refers to the lowest, but not necessarily the only one channel from a device processes the DMX values​​. A 4-channel dimmer with the start address 5 evaluates the channels 5,6,7 and 8, a moving head can prove quite 15 or more channels for its functions. It is also possible to assign the same start address multiple devices. This can lead to unwanted results, but are also deliberately used in the same headlights for synchronous outputs.&lt;br /&gt;
As the start address is set, depends on the device, please note here the manufacturer&#039;s instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHint&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = In the Device Configuration dialog box, the positions of DIP switches own piano are displayed to the selected start address. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
A submaster is a [[#Fader|fader]] can control the values ​​of different channels together. The submaster concept in DMXControl by realized, each consisting of a submaster fader and flash button [[Submaster_DMXC2|Submaster module.]] Using a submaster, for example, the same functions are bundled, so all channels of 10 red LED headlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
A show consists of various cues. A cue is an instantaneous adjustment of all connected devices (DMX values​​). A fade and hold time can be specified for each scene, which remain within it comes to fruition [[#Scene_list|scene list]] or [#Chaser|chaser]. Values ​​of a cue to remain active on the issue, until they are explicitly overridden, for example by a different cue.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the &amp;quot;simple cue&amp;quot; can [[#Command|commands]], motion or [[#audio_cue|audio cue]] can be used. All cues can be managed in the cue library and can be selected and reused from there. Composition cues can combine any types of cues.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  The concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;cue&#039;&#039;&#039; from DMXControl corresponds to the &#039;&#039;&#039;scene&#039;&#039;&#039; from various other light control programs.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cue list ===&lt;br /&gt;
One or more cues form a cue list. The maximum number of cues per cue list is limited only by the resources of your computer. Playing a cue list indicates the sequential execution of all individual cues taking into account its duration and fade. The cues can also be forwarded manually. Multiple lists can run in parallel cue at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3419</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3419"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:30:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Project */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31 Pack and Go]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3418</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3418"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:29:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* P */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various projects (shows), and save (one at a time just a project) load. DMXControl in a project contains all project data that are relevant for a show. Such data include which DMX devices are used, created scenes and effects, input and output configurations and more. However, they are stored by the individual modules of DMXC in a shared folder with different file extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, there are also so called &#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039; data, the DMXControl across projects in a separate directory (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt; &amp;quot;%appdata%/PopSoft /&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) stores. These global data including settings of the MIDI and DMX remote controls. Therefore, these data must be copied when copying a project to another computer. How this works easiest, may be found [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Chapter 31]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3417</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3417"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:25:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Mixer mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
The channel of the internal mixer can be mixed to 2 standards, these are [[#LTP|LTP]] and [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3416</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3416"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:18:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various modules equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio cue the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new modules and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an chaser. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing chaser. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a cue, it can only be set by the next cue, or by closing the cue module back to a lower value . When a cue fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this cue a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of chasers and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active modules and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly modules) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the module that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another chaser of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3415</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3415"/>
		<updated>2013-11-17T05:15:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* M */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an effect. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing effect. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a scene , it can only be set by the next scene, or by closing the scene tools back to a lower value . When a scene fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this scene a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
A master is the load Which authority has influence on the signal before it reaches the output. Changes to a master controller act synchronously on all channels and give maximum values ​​for them before in DMXControl there is the module [[Master_DMXC2|Master]], where grand master (dimmer), secondary master (dimmer), flash master and Speedmaster (speed of effects and fading times) maximum value for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl internally uses a mixer that collects the DMX outputs of the various active tools and generates the output values​​, which are then displayed on the respective DMX transmitter. The different sources (ie mostly tools) are referred to as &amp;quot;Mixer channels&amp;quot;, not to be confused with DMX channels. A mixer channel usually covers the entire DMX channel space that the respective DMXControl version is available (256 or 512 channels). If a mixer channel &amp;quot;&#039;&#039; closed&#039;&#039; &#039;, are also calculates the new output values​​. The blender system of DMXControl always the tool that was operated by the user as a last resort reserves the Controlle until:&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is closed, &lt;br /&gt;
*	another module is operated&lt;br /&gt;
*	the module is reset. &lt;br /&gt;
Some modules such as the audio player example provide a button with which you can reset the module (small red circle with a slash through). &#039;&#039; &#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If one uses a channel with the flash button on the submaster, the submaster is the last module, which accesses the channel. Thus, another effect of this DMX channel acts again, you can do 3 things:&lt;br /&gt;
*	close the submaster window, &lt;br /&gt;
*	start the chaser again and&lt;br /&gt;
*	reset the Submaster. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixer mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3414</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3414"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:59:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* L */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an effect. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing effect. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a scene , it can only be set by the next scene, or by closing the scene tools back to a lower value . When a scene fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Preheat ===&lt;br /&gt;
The preheat (also Pre Heat) serves to increase the life of your bulbs. The lamps are not switched off completely, but always operated slightly dimmed, so that the lamp is not currently visible. In DMXControl can reach a preheat by&lt;br /&gt;
*	activate the HTP mode (in the program settings) &lt;br /&gt;
*	save a cue that contains the desired channel values ​​for the preheating and &lt;br /&gt;
*	this scene a [[#Command|command]] call at startup can (also program settings).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP stands for &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the last value prevails) and is automatically used when DMXControl for all channels that are not marked as &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot;. The last channel change is passed directly to the output system. If the mixer channel is closed, the state before the first change by the just closed mixer channel will be restored on each DMX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line termination ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a low-loss and trouble-free transmission of the DMX signal DMX512 protocol requires a terminating resistor of 120 ohms at the end of the DMX chain between Data + and Data-(pin 2 and 3). So that feedback and to prevent signal reflections that could distort further transmitted values​​. There are to buy commercial terminators (5-7 €), but you can be prepared in a DMX connector such a device itself also through the incorporation of an appropriate resistor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3413</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3413"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:54:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* H */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP stands for &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (the highest value prevails ) and is usually used for dimmer channels ,e.g. To prevent flicker by parallel changes from several sources.&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl HTP can be applied to all channels that are marked as type=&amp;quot;dimmer&amp;quot; in DDF. Thus, the highest value is always output on one channel, for example we can the sound analyzer and run at the same time can also create an effect. Would be possible that a preheat , because the value &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; would be compared to the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; as by setting an ongoing effect. By default, the HTP mode is disabled, but can be switched to the application configuration easy.&lt;br /&gt;
HTP / LTP processed per channel - channels in the DDF as a &amp;quot; dimmer type = &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are registered HTP are mixed , the rest of LTP . But if you completely shut down the program configuration HTP , then dimmer channels are mixed LTP . If you have problems with &amp;quot;hanging &amp;quot; channels , which probably has to do with the HTP mode. In the channel list is displayed which channel of which was last modified mixer channel . If for example a fully wound channel of a scene , it can only be set by the next scene, or by closing the scene tools back to a lower value . When a scene fades into another , the old values ​​should also be reduced .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3412</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3412"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:49:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Gobo / Goborad */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Gobo wheel ===&lt;br /&gt;
A gobo (Graphical optical blackout) alters the beam of a spotlight. It is a mask that can be cut out of geometric shapes, texts or images. The light beam then assumes this shape. Gobos are constructed of metal stamped from thin sheet metal or glass gobos more expensive than in combination with [[#color filter|dichroic filters.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the headlamps often even more screens sit on a circular gobo. Depending on the rotation of the gobo wheel, there is a certain gobo in the beam, the beam then becomes the subject. Also there is the possibility to have gobos rotate around itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3411</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3411"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:48:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* G */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Device===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl the term device refers to a point in the DMX chain, where the signal is evaluated. This can happen, for example by:&lt;br /&gt;
*	an dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	an fog machine&lt;br /&gt;
*	an multi-function spotlight as moving head or scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	an [[#DMXC plugin|Application plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	everything DMX can process&lt;br /&gt;
A device is usually (but not necessarily) physically present and responsive to the transmitted signals DMX. Devices are described by DDF, containing all the necessary information for control. In the graphical view of the Stage devices can be created, deleted, and moved in front of the background image. A click on the device icon opens the Control Panel. Devices always need a [[#Start address|Start address]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3410</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3410"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:44:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* F */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons set their assigned channels temporarily (for the duration of the operation) to the maximum allowable value. This is in DMXControl by the maximum values ​​in the DDF and the [[Master_DMXC2|Flash master]] defined&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3409</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3409"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:41:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* F */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
A fader is a mechanical slider more classically wisely which changes an electrical resistance and is found at audio or light sound mixers, for example. The English verb to fade expresses a fluent, continuous transition between two values. This is primarily confessed dull one and dull out as volume change at the beginning and end of a piece of music. (Software-)faders are used in DMXControl mainly in the [[#Submaster|submaster]]. You serve to adjust exact DMX values or to realize gentle transitions between cues. Also in much DDFs faders are defined and make the attitude possible there among other things of trick and strobe speed or colors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color filter===&lt;br /&gt;
A color filter is a firm intention for a lamp which shall ink her light. Color filters are usually colored plastic films. Besides that there is also dichroic filter, which consist of glass and make a considerably better filtration possible at a higher price. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color wheel===&lt;br /&gt;
A color wheel is often found in moving heads and other multifunction headlights. It is a plate on which glass color filters are arranged circularly and reach to the course of ray. Discreet light colors or half colors are produced by the color wheel be able to into been different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash button ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flash buttons setzen die ihnen zugewiesenen Kanäle kurzzeitig( für die Dauer der Betätigung) auf den zulässigen Maximalwert Dieser wird in DMXControl durch die Maximalwerte in dem DDF und den[[ Master DMXC2| Flashmaster]] festgelegt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3408</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3408"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:27:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* Fade in time */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can fading point do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Fader ist klassischerweise ein mechanischer Schieberegler, der einen elektrischen Widerstand ändert und findet sich beispielsweise an Audio- oder Lichtmischpulten. Das englische Verb to fade drückt einen fließenden, kontinuierlichen Übergang zwischen zwei Werten aus. Bekannt ist vor allem das Fadein und Fadeout als Laustärkeänderung am Beginn und Ende eines Musikstücks. (Software-)Fader finden in DMXControl hauptsächlich im [[#Submaster|Submaster Tool]] Verwendung. Sie dienen dazu, genaue DMX-Werte einzustellen oder sanfte Übergänge zwischen Szenen zu realisieren. Auch in vielen DDFs sind Fader definiert und ermöglichen dort unter anderem die Einstellung von Dreh- und Strobegeschwindigkeiten oder Farben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbfilter ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbfilter ist ein Vorsatz für eine Lampe, der ihr Licht einfärben soll. Meist sind Farbfilter farbige Kunststofffolien. Daneben gibt es auch dichroitischen Filter, die aus Glas bestehen und eine deutlich bessere Filterung ermöglichen zu einem höheren Preis. &amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;http://eshop.steinigke.de/out/pictures/wysiwigpro/cmscontent/support/whitepaper/de/licht/Filtercaf%C3%A9%20%E2%80%93%20Was%20ist%20ein%20dichroitischer%20Filter.pdf&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbrad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbrad findet sich oft in Movingheads und anderen Multifunktionsscheinwerfern. Es ist eine Scheibe, auf welcher [[#Farbfilter|Glasfarbfilter]] kreisförmig angeordnet sind und in den Strahlengang reichen. Durch das Farbrad können in verschiedenen diskrete Lichtfarben oder Halbfarben erzeugt werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flashbutton ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flashbuttons setzen die ihnen zugewiesenen Kanäle kurzzeitig (für die Dauer der Betätigung) auf den zulässigen Maximalwert. Dieser wird in DMXControl durch die Maximalwerte im DDF und den [[Master DMXC2|Flashmaster]] festgelegt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3407</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3407"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:26:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* E */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fade in time ===&lt;br /&gt;
One can define a one dazzling time in DMXControl for every cue around gentle fadeing to realize between cues. Be the DMX values brought closer to the stored values continuously and finally put on these during this period of time (engl. [[#Fader|fading]]). The contrast to this is a sudden change of the values at a one dazzling time of 0 seconds. Which not faded are (e.g. Gobo wheels) one can [[#Fading point|fading point]] do for channels be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Fader ist klassischerweise ein mechanischer Schieberegler, der einen elektrischen Widerstand ändert und findet sich beispielsweise an Audio- oder Lichtmischpulten. Das englische Verb to fade drückt einen fließenden, kontinuierlichen Übergang zwischen zwei Werten aus. Bekannt ist vor allem das Fadein und Fadeout als Laustärkeänderung am Beginn und Ende eines Musikstücks. (Software-)Fader finden in DMXControl hauptsächlich im [[#Submaster|Submaster Tool]] Verwendung. Sie dienen dazu, genaue DMX-Werte einzustellen oder sanfte Übergänge zwischen Szenen zu realisieren. Auch in vielen DDFs sind Fader definiert und ermöglichen dort unter anderem die Einstellung von Dreh- und Strobegeschwindigkeiten oder Farben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbfilter ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbfilter ist ein Vorsatz für eine Lampe, der ihr Licht einfärben soll. Meist sind Farbfilter farbige Kunststofffolien. Daneben gibt es auch dichroitischen Filter, die aus Glas bestehen und eine deutlich bessere Filterung ermöglichen zu einem höheren Preis. &amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;http://eshop.steinigke.de/out/pictures/wysiwigpro/cmscontent/support/whitepaper/de/licht/Filtercaf%C3%A9%20%E2%80%93%20Was%20ist%20ein%20dichroitischer%20Filter.pdf&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbrad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbrad findet sich oft in Movingheads und anderen Multifunktionsscheinwerfern. Es ist eine Scheibe, auf welcher [[#Farbfilter|Glasfarbfilter]] kreisförmig angeordnet sind und in den Strahlengang reichen. Durch das Farbrad können in verschiedenen diskrete Lichtfarben oder Halbfarben erzeugt werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flashbutton ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flashbuttons setzen die ihnen zugewiesenen Kanäle kurzzeitig (für die Dauer der Betätigung) auf den zulässigen Maximalwert. Dieser wird in DMXControl durch die Maximalwerte im DDF und den [[Master DMXC2|Flashmaster]] festgelegt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3406</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3406"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T19:18:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* D */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The DMX512 protocol 1986 of the USITT, an American organization was defined, which deals among others with theater technology (short DMX). With various improvements it is also standardized in Germany since 1994 (DIN 56930/Teil2). DMX stands &#039;&#039;&#039;for D &#039;igital&#039;, &#039;M &#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039; &#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, which means that the signals are transferred digitally over a line to the dimmers and other devices&#039;&#039;&#039;. Unlike this the earlier ones had systems one analogous line each for every single device. Since the equipment is switched at DMX behind each other, one also talks about a DMX chain (engl. daisychain). In a plain verse attached equipment has a clear start address between 1 and 512 everybody. However, at most 32 equipment only should be attached at a DMX rope since otherwise the burden on the line gets too big. Remedial action then can be taken with amplifiers or splinters. A value between 0 and 255 sent can weden over the DMX protocol on every channel in a cycle. The meaning of the value isn&#039;t defined in the DMX protocol but depends on the device individually. Protected two wire lines shall be used for DMX with 5-pole XLR plugs. However, in the practice one finds 3-pole XLR verb Indians at a favorable equipment particularly in front of - these aren&#039;t then, however, standard-compliant and mustn&#039;t bear the name &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl defines two kinds of Plugins for the expansion of the functionality: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Outout plugins to the support of different new DMX interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	Application plugins for inserting new tools and functions in DMXControl&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;DMX interface&amp;quot; (also frequently called &amp;quot;DMX transmitter&amp;quot;) represents the hardware interface between PC and the DMX universe. There are the values produced by DMXControl on the DMX chain. The transmitters can parallel or about USB serially internally be attached at the PC. One needs a DMX interface for productive use of DMXControl or the real drive of a DMX-capable device, in principle the program works completely (primarily for exercise purposes) also without interface. DMXControl uses output plugins to mention different DMX transmitters with a uniform interface. A complete list of the DMX interfaces supported by DMXControl is found on our [[http://www. dmxcontrol. de/unterstuetzte-interfaces. html|Website]]. The DMXControl interface specification is available so that you your self can make an output plugin. At the program start DMXControl is looking for files in his contents directory with the ending &amp;quot;*.out.dll&amp;quot; which the output plugins represent. One then can activate and configure the required plugins over the menu item of output plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmer channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
Channels which function as dimmers become in the DDF of the respective device by means of type=dimmer when such defines. Using this information DMXControl only can apply certain functions to channels which also steer the brightness of a device. Among other things these are:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master_DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatic [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Joist below the device icon in the [[Graphical_view_DMXC2|Graphical view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Einblendzeit ===&lt;br /&gt;
Um sanfte Übergange zwischen Szenen zu realisieren, kann man in DMXControl eine Einblendzeit für jede Szene definieren. Während dieser Zeitspane werden die DMX-Werte kontinuierlich den gespeicherten Werten angenähert und schließlich auf diese gesetzt (engl. [[#Fader|faden]]). Der Gegensatz dazu ist eine schlagartige Änderung der Werte bei einer Einblendzeit von 0 Sekunden. Bei Kanälen, welche nicht gefadet werden(z.&amp;amp;nbsp;B. Goboräder), kann ein [[#Überblendpunkt|Überblendpunkt]] definiert werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Fader ist klassischerweise ein mechanischer Schieberegler, der einen elektrischen Widerstand ändert und findet sich beispielsweise an Audio- oder Lichtmischpulten. Das englische Verb to fade drückt einen fließenden, kontinuierlichen Übergang zwischen zwei Werten aus. Bekannt ist vor allem das Fadein und Fadeout als Laustärkeänderung am Beginn und Ende eines Musikstücks. (Software-)Fader finden in DMXControl hauptsächlich im [[#Submaster|Submaster Tool]] Verwendung. Sie dienen dazu, genaue DMX-Werte einzustellen oder sanfte Übergänge zwischen Szenen zu realisieren. Auch in vielen DDFs sind Fader definiert und ermöglichen dort unter anderem die Einstellung von Dreh- und Strobegeschwindigkeiten oder Farben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbfilter ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbfilter ist ein Vorsatz für eine Lampe, der ihr Licht einfärben soll. Meist sind Farbfilter farbige Kunststofffolien. Daneben gibt es auch dichroitischen Filter, die aus Glas bestehen und eine deutlich bessere Filterung ermöglichen zu einem höheren Preis. &amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;http://eshop.steinigke.de/out/pictures/wysiwigpro/cmscontent/support/whitepaper/de/licht/Filtercaf%C3%A9%20%E2%80%93%20Was%20ist%20ein%20dichroitischer%20Filter.pdf&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbrad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbrad findet sich oft in Movingheads und anderen Multifunktionsscheinwerfern. Es ist eine Scheibe, auf welcher [[#Farbfilter|Glasfarbfilter]] kreisförmig angeordnet sind und in den Strahlengang reichen. Durch das Farbrad können in verschiedenen diskrete Lichtfarben oder Halbfarben erzeugt werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flashbutton ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flashbuttons setzen die ihnen zugewiesenen Kanäle kurzzeitig (für die Dauer der Betätigung) auf den zulässigen Maximalwert. Dieser wird in DMXControl durch die Maximalwerte im DDF und den [[Master DMXC2|Flashmaster]] festgelegt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3405</id>
		<title>Glossary DMXC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki-en.dmxcontrol-projects.org/index.php?title=Glossary_DMXC2&amp;diff=3405"/>
		<updated>2013-11-16T16:02:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Steiny: /* D */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Chaptertitle_DMXC}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Inuse}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|25.5.2013: UPrenner: create the article page&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;25.10.2013 UPrenner: work-in-progress&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--25.10.2013: UPrenner article ready, just update of pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are a native speaker, please Help us and review this--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;hintergrundfarbe1 rahmenfarbe1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin: 0 auto; border-style: solid; padding:5px;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inhaltsverzeichnis&#039;&#039;&#039; [[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] C [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] I J K [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] N O [[#P|P]] Q R [[#S|S]] T U V W X Y Z [[#Ü|Ü]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{TOCright}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Start-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== ArtNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
ArtNet (or Art-Net) is an IP based protocol for the assignment of large quantities of DMX information about LANs or WANs under use of the default network topology. The present ArtNet uses UDP about IP. The specification was made by the company &amp;quot;Artistic Licence&amp;quot; and is freely available in version 3 at the moment ([http://www.artisticlicence.com/WebSiteMaster/User%20Guides/art-net.pdf Download]). She was appreciated by bigger manufacturers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.martin.com/product/product.asp?product=Ether2DMX8&amp;amp;Words=artnet Martin Ether2DMX8™]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.jb-lighting.de/index.php?S=3_3&amp;amp;P=41#fragment-2 JB Lightning Licon 2X]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Einbindung in die [http://www.opendmx.net/index.php/OLA Open Lighting Architecture]. Abgerufen am 12. März 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The advantage of ArtNet consists that the DMX cables are replaced by Ethernetkabel in parts of the transmission path. One needs no more classic DMX transmitter at the PC with that since the signals are sent about a mostly per default available network interface. A complete show can theoretically be steered over the Internet with that. WLAN ways are more practice relevant so that the wiring can be dropped on unfavorable ways or even for the most part. Another advantage is the bi direktionale communication for re-registrations by means of RDM which, however, isn&#039;t supported of DMXControl yet. Also proprietary protocols are conceivable since the UPD protocol bi direktional is interpreted.&lt;br /&gt;
Since the steered equipment has DMX interfaces for the most part by means of 5-pole XLR sockets furthermore, one needs another one or several so-called ArtNet knots which one, the ArtNet information in standard DMX 512 signals zurückverwandeln. So an ArtNet knot gets the signals about a network interface for one and or more DMX university verses distributes the DMX signals separated according to university verses about XLR. These Nodes even can be built themselves: [[Art-Net-Node für 25 Euro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio cue ===&lt;br /&gt;
Audio cues permit playing an audio file in a definable length. You are usable for cues in various tools equally. The light technician also can synchronously steer audio sequences to the light with that. E.g. there is an important application for this at the theater control by means of script.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_edit_cues_audio_cue.png|1|Create a audio cue}}&lt;br /&gt;
To other cues an audio cue analogously gets an eloquent name so that these are re-traceable also in the cue library. As a wave file WAVE, MP3, MP2, MP1 and OGG-Vorbis files can be used. Like other cues also can the audio cue a duration be assigned to control the temporal sequence of the cues and with that the length of the wave file as of the beginning. Has suitably to be broken off around the audio input after the adjusted time the option &amp;quot;after passed duration stop account&amp;quot;. The duration also can on be limited manually to carry out the control over the &amp;quot;GO&amp;quot; button. Audio cues can be assigned to one by 16 (audio-)channels. About the channel number audio cues can be broken off by command. Siehe auch [[#Audio manager|Audio manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio manager === &lt;br /&gt;
The audio manager as a drop down menu hides behind the &amp;quot;audio stop&amp;quot; button or courage button in the control center (loudspeaker with a red point). An overview has active audio streams (channels) opened out for itself there. The left symbol says to the statuses of the respective audio scene the audio stream can be manipulated with the respectively right symbol group with the usual functions break, rewinding, stop. The channels can be changed in the volume one by one and switched dumbly about orders. Several audio cues also can be on a channel.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Picture_with_subtitle |DMXC2_Manual_glossary_audioManager.png|2|View of the audio manager in the control center|600px}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Output plugins ===&lt;br /&gt;
The union on the side of the software which processes the generated DMX data represents a version Plugin between DMXControl and a hard or software. This mainly is DMX interfaces (transmitters) which pass the data (mostly cable-bound) on to a DMX-capable device. The union to a visualisierer or by ArtNet is but also taken by output plugins. See also [[Output_plugins_DMXC2|Output plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Termination resistor===&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure of a loss and trouble-free assignment of the DMX signals the DMX512 protocol requires RS485 standard a terminating resistor of 120 Ohm at the end of the DMX chain between the signal leads (exact this). Feedbacks and signal reflections which could distort further sent values are prevented with that. €Zhowever, one gets her aurochs guarantee of a loss and trouble-free also by the installation of a corresponding resistance into a DMX plug between datas+ and data ), (Pin 1 and 2) produce themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== B ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bank ===&lt;br /&gt;
Banks which serve for the ready attitude of different attitudes of the same module can be laid out within certain modules. By means of commands you can change between the Banks. Banks can be made in the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
; DMXIn remote control: Different assignment of DMX channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Command box (Pages): Choice of different pages (at most 10)&lt;br /&gt;
; Midi Fernsteuerung: Different assignment of MIDI channels&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound Analyzer: Different assignment of settings&lt;br /&gt;
; Submaster: Assignment of the 12 sub-masters. It is for &amp;quot; possible to order groups of equipment logically front &amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Audience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hall light&amp;quot; for example bench parse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Command ===&lt;br /&gt;
see [[Command_overview_DMXC2|Command overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackout ===&lt;br /&gt;
A blackout describes turning off immediately ( or in the lighting engineering. Darken ) all light sources. Transferred to the DMX protocol this means that all dimmer channels are immediately put on 0%. A &amp;quot;blackout&amp;quot; buttone is in DMXControl in the control center. If this is activated, all channels defined as dimmer channels are backed 0% and the version closed on these channels until the blackout is lifted again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== D ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== DDF ===&lt;br /&gt;
DDF is the abbreviation of &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;DEVICE definition file&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. DDFs are used by DMXControl to describe information about the used equipment in the XML format. Among other things the channel occupancy of the device, the layout of the control window as well as further information are contained in a DDF. The DDFs are in the sub-folder &amp;quot;DEVICEs&amp;quot; of the DMXControl contents directory. The accompanying device image files which are shown on the graphical view lie name in another sub-folder „Images“. A DDF library is installed per default. For the construction of DDFs see [[DDF_DMXC2|DDF basics]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX512 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Das DMX512 Protokoll (kurz DMX) wurde 1886 von der USITT, einer amerikanischen Organisation definiert, die sich u.a. mit Theater-Technik beschäftigt. Mit diversen Verbesserungen ist es auch seit 1994 in Deutschland standardisiert (DIN 56930 /Teil2). DMX steht für &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039;igital&#039;&#039;&#039;M&#039;&#039;&#039;ultiple&#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039;, was bedeutet, dass die Signale zu den Dimmern und anderen Geräten digital über eine Leitung übertragen werden. Im Gegensatz dazu hatten die früheren Systeme jeweils eine analoge Leitung zu jedem einzelnen Gerät. Da die Geräte bei DMX hintereinander geschaltet sind, spricht man auch von einer DMX-Kette (engl. daisychain). Jedes angeschlossenes Gerät in einem Universe hat eine eindeutige Startadresse zwischen 1 und 512. An einem DMX-Strang sollten aber nur maximal 32 Geräte angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Last auf der Leitung zu groß wird. Dann kann mit Verstärkern oder Splittern Abhilfe geschaffen werden. Über das DMX Protokoll kann in einem Zyklus auf jedem Kanal ein Wert zwischen 0 und 255 gesendet weden. Die Bedeutung des Wertes ist nicht im DMX Protokoll definiert, sondern hängt individuell vom Gerät ab. Für DMX sollen abgeschirmte Zweidraht-Leitungen mit 5-poligen XLR-Steckern verwendet werden. In der Praxis findet man aber insbesondere bei günstigen Geräten 3-polige XLR-Verbinder vor - diese sind dann aber nicht normgerecht und dürfen nicht die Bezeichnung &#039;&#039;DMX512&#039;&#039; tragen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMXC Plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl definiert zwei Arten von Plugins zur Erweiterung der Funktionalität: &lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Ausgabeplugins|Ausgabeplugins]] zur Unterstützung verschiedener neuer DMX Interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
*	[[:Kategorie:Plugins_DMXControl_2|Anwendungsplugins]] zum Einfügen neuer Tools und Funktionen in DMXControl &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DMX Interface ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein &amp;quot;DMX Interface&amp;quot; (häufig auch &amp;quot;DMX Transmitter&amp;quot; oder &amp;quot;DMX-Sender&amp;quot; genannt) stellt das Hardware-Interface zwischen PC und dem DMX-Universum dar. Es gibt die von DMXControl erzeugten Werte auf die DMX-Kette. Die Transmitter können intern, seriell, parallel oder über USB am PC angeschlossen sein. Für den produktiven Einsatz von DMXControl bzw. die reale Ansteuerung von DMX-fähigen Geräten benötigt man ein DMX Interface, prinzipiell funktioniert das Programm (vor allem zu Übungszwecken) auch ohne Interface vollständig. DMXControl verwendet Ausgabeplugins, um verschiedene DMX-Sender mit einer einheitlichen Schnittstelle anzusprechen. Auf unserer [http://www.dmxcontrol.de/unterstuetzte-interfaces.html Homepage] findet sich eine komplette Liste der von DMXControl unterstützten DMX Interfaces. Die DMXControl-seitige Interface-Spezifikation ist verfügbar, so dass Sie selbst ein Ausgabeplugin erstellen können. Beim Programmstart sucht DMXControl in seinem Programmverzeichnis nach Dateien mit der Endung &amp;quot;.out.dll&amp;quot;, welche die Ausgabeplugins repräsentieren. Über den Menüpunkt Ausgabeplugins kann man dann die benötigten Plugins aktivieren und konfigurieren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dimmerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
Kanäle, welche als Dimmer fungieren, werden im DDF des jeweiligen Gerätes mittels type=dimmer“ als solche definiert. Anhand dieser Information kann DMXControl bestimmte Funktionen nur auf Kanäle anwenden, die auch die Helligkeit eines Gerätes steuern. Dies sind unter anderem:&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[Master DMXC2|Grandmaster]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	[[#Blackout|Blackout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Automatisches [[#HTP|HTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	Balken unterhalb des Geräte-Icons in der [[Grafische Bühnenansicht DMXC2|Grafischen Bühnenansicht]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Einblendzeit ===&lt;br /&gt;
Um sanfte Übergange zwischen Szenen zu realisieren, kann man in DMXControl eine Einblendzeit für jede Szene definieren. Während dieser Zeitspane werden die DMX-Werte kontinuierlich den gespeicherten Werten angenähert und schließlich auf diese gesetzt (engl. [[#Fader|faden]]). Der Gegensatz dazu ist eine schlagartige Änderung der Werte bei einer Einblendzeit von 0 Sekunden. Bei Kanälen, welche nicht gefadet werden(z.&amp;amp;nbsp;B. Goboräder), kann ein [[#Überblendpunkt|Überblendpunkt]] definiert werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fader ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Fader ist klassischerweise ein mechanischer Schieberegler, der einen elektrischen Widerstand ändert und findet sich beispielsweise an Audio- oder Lichtmischpulten. Das englische Verb to fade drückt einen fließenden, kontinuierlichen Übergang zwischen zwei Werten aus. Bekannt ist vor allem das Fadein und Fadeout als Laustärkeänderung am Beginn und Ende eines Musikstücks. (Software-)Fader finden in DMXControl hauptsächlich im [[#Submaster|Submaster Tool]] Verwendung. Sie dienen dazu, genaue DMX-Werte einzustellen oder sanfte Übergänge zwischen Szenen zu realisieren. Auch in vielen DDFs sind Fader definiert und ermöglichen dort unter anderem die Einstellung von Dreh- und Strobegeschwindigkeiten oder Farben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbfilter ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbfilter ist ein Vorsatz für eine Lampe, der ihr Licht einfärben soll. Meist sind Farbfilter farbige Kunststofffolien. Daneben gibt es auch dichroitischen Filter, die aus Glas bestehen und eine deutlich bessere Filterung ermöglichen zu einem höheren Preis. &amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;http://eshop.steinigke.de/out/pictures/wysiwigpro/cmscontent/support/whitepaper/de/licht/Filtercaf%C3%A9%20%E2%80%93%20Was%20ist%20ein%20dichroitischer%20Filter.pdf&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Farbrad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Farbrad findet sich oft in Movingheads und anderen Multifunktionsscheinwerfern. Es ist eine Scheibe, auf welcher [[#Farbfilter|Glasfarbfilter]] kreisförmig angeordnet sind und in den Strahlengang reichen. Durch das Farbrad können in verschiedenen diskrete Lichtfarben oder Halbfarben erzeugt werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flashbutton ===&lt;br /&gt;
Flashbuttons setzen die ihnen zugewiesenen Kanäle kurzzeitig (für die Dauer der Betätigung) auf den zulässigen Maximalwert. Dieser wird in DMXControl durch die Maximalwerte im DDF und den [[Master DMXC2|Flashmaster]] festgelegt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== G ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gerät ===&lt;br /&gt;
In DMXControl bezeichnet der Begriff Gerät einen Punkt in der DMX-Signalkette, an dem das Signal ausgewertet wird. Dies kann beispielsweise geschehen durch &lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Dimmer&lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Nebelmaschine&lt;br /&gt;
*	einen Multifunktionsscheinwerfer wie Movinghead oder Scanner&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein [[#DMXC Plugin|Anwendungsplugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
*	ein Flammenwerfer :) &lt;br /&gt;
*	alles, was DMX verarbeiten kann&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gerät ist meist (aber nicht zwingend) auch physikalisch vorhanden und reagiert auf die gesendeten DMX-Signale. Geräte werden durch DDFs beschrieben, diese enthalten alle nötigen Informationen zur Ansteuerung. In der Grafischen Bühnenansicht können Geräte angelegt, gelöscht und vor dem Hintergrundbild verschoben werden. Ein Klick auf das Geräteicon öffnet das Steuerungsfenster. Geräte benötigen immer eine [[#Startadresse|Startadresse]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gobo / Goborad ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Gobo (Graphical optical blackout) verändert den Lichtstrahl eines Scheinwerfers. Es ist eine Maske, aus der geometrische Formen, Texte oder Bilder herausgeschnitten sein können. Der Lichtstrahl nimmt dann diese Form an. Gobos gibt es in Metallausführung aus dünnen Blech gestanzt oder als teurere Glasgobos in Kombination mit [[#Farbfilter|dichroitischen Filtern]]. &lt;br /&gt;
In den Scheinwerfern selbst sitzen oftmals mehrere Gobos kreisförmig auf einem Goborad. Je nach Drehung des Goborades, befindet sich ein bestimmtes Gobo im Lichtstrahl, wobei der Strahl dann dessen Motiv annimmt. Auch gibt es die Möglichkeit, Gobos um sich selbst rotieren zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== H ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== HTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
HTP steht für &amp;quot;highest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der höchste Wert setzt sich durch) und wird üblicherweise für Dimmerkanäle benutzt, um z.B. ein Flackern durch parallele Änderungen aus mehreren Quellen zu verhindern. &lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl kann HTP auf alle Kanäle anwenden, die als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Somit wird immer der höchste Wert auf einem Kanal ausgegeben, so dass man z.B. den Sound Analyzer laufen lassen und gleichzeitig einen Effekt darüberlegen kann. Möglich wäre damit auch eine Lampenvorheizung, denn der Wert &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; würde sich gegenüber der &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; z.B. von einem laufenden Effekt durchsetzen. Standardmäßig ist der HTP-Modus deaktiviert, kann aber in der Programmkonfiguration einfach eingeschaltet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
HTP/LTP wird pro Kanal verarbeitet - Kanäle die im DDF als &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;type=dimmer&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; eingetragen sind werden HTP gemischt, der Rest LTP. Wenn man in der Programmkonfiguration HTP aber komplett abschaltet, dann werden auch Dimmerkanäle LTP-gemischt. Wenn Sie Probleme mit &amp;quot;hängenden&amp;quot; Kanälen haben, hat das vermutlich mit dem HTP-Modus zu tun. In der Kanalübersicht wird angezeigt, welcher Kanal von welchem Mixerkanal zuletzt verändert wurde. Wird z.B. ein Kanal von einer Szene voll aufgezogen, kann er nur von der nächsten Szene oder durch Schließen des Szenentools wieder auf einen niedrigeren Wert gesetzt werden. Wenn eine Szene in eine andere überblendet, sollten sich die alten Werte auch reduzieren lassen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== L == &lt;br /&gt;
=== Lampenvorheizung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Die Lampenvorheizung (auch Pre Heat) dient dazu, die Lebensdauer Ihrer Leuchtmittel zu erhöhen. Dabei werden die Lampen nicht ganz ausgeschaltet, sondern immer leicht gedimmt betrieben, sodass die Lampe gerade noch nicht sichtbar ist. In DMXControl lässt sich eine Lampenvorheizung erreichen, indem Sie &lt;br /&gt;
*	den HTP-Modus aktivieren (in der Programmkonfiguration), &lt;br /&gt;
*	eine Szene speichern, die die gewünschten Kanalwerte für die Vorheizung enthält und &lt;br /&gt;
*	diese Szene über einen [[#Befehl|Befehl]] beim Programmstart aufrufen lassen (auch Programmkonfiguration).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
=== LTP ===&lt;br /&gt;
LTP steht für &amp;quot;latest takes precedence&amp;quot; (der letzte Wert setzt sich durch) und wird bei DMXControl automatisch für alle Kanäle benutzt, die nicht als &amp;quot;Dimmer&amp;quot; gekennzeichnet sind. Dabei wird die letzte Kanaländerung direkt an das Ausgabesystem weitergereicht. Wird der Mixerkanal geschlossen, wird auf jedem DMX-Kanal der Zustand vor der ersten Änderung durch den gerade geschlossenen Mixerkanal wiederhergestellt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leitungsterminierung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zur Gewährleistung einer verlust- und störungsfreien Übertragung des DMX-Signals verlangt das DMX512 Protokoll einen Abschlusswiderstand von 120 Ohm am Ende der DMX-Kette zwischen Data+ und Data- (Pin 2 und 3). Damit werden Rückkopplungen und Signalreflexionen verhindert, die weitere gesendete Werte verfälschen könnten. Es gibt kommerzielle Abschlussstecker zu kaufen (5-7€), man kann sich aber auch durch den Einbau eines entsprechenden Widerstandes in einen DMX-Stecker ein solches Gerät selbst herstellen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Master ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Master ist die letzte Instanz, die Einfluss auf das Signal nimmt, bevor es zur Ausgabe gelangt. Änderungen an einem Master Controller wirken sich synchron auf alle untergeordneten Kanäle aus bzw. geben Maximalwerte für sie vor. In DMXControl gibt es das Modul [[Master DMXC2|Master]], in dem sich Grandmaster (Dimmer), Sekundärmaster (Dimmer), Flashmaster (Maximalwert für [[#Flashbutton|Flashbutton]]) und Speedmaster (Geschwindigkeit von Effekten und Einblendzeiten) befinden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixerkanal ===&lt;br /&gt;
DMXControl verwendet intern einen Mixer, der die DMX-Ausgaben der verschiedenen aktiven Tools sammelt und daraus die Ausgabewerte generiert, die dann auf dem jeweiligen DMX-Sender ausgegeben werden. Die unterschiedlichen Quellen (also meist Tools) werden dabei als &amp;quot;Mixerkanäle&amp;quot; bezeichnet, nicht zu verwechseln mit DMX-Kanälen. Ein Mixerkanal umfasst normalerweise den gesamten DMX-Kanalraum, den die jeweilige DMXControl-Version zur Verfügung stellt (256 bzw. 512 Kanäle). Wird ein Mixerkanal „&#039;&#039;geschlossen&#039;&#039;“, werden auch die Ausgabewerte neu berechnet. Im Mixersystem von DMXControl behält immer das Tool, das vom User als letztes bedient wurde die Controlle, bis &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool geschlossen wird, &lt;br /&gt;
*	ein anderes Tool bedient wird &lt;br /&gt;
*	das Tool zurückgesetzt wird. &lt;br /&gt;
Manche Tools wie der Audioplayer z.B. bieten eine Taste, mit der man das Tool rücksetzen kann (kleiner roter durchgestrichener Kreis). &#039;&#039;&#039;Beispiel&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man mit der Flash Taste des Submasters einen Kanal bedient, ist der Submaster das letzte Tool, was auf den Kanal zugreift. Damit ein anderer Effekt auf diesem DMX-Kanal wieder wirkt, kann man 3 Dinge tun:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Das Submaster Fenster schließen, &lt;br /&gt;
*	den Effekt neu starten und&lt;br /&gt;
*	den Submaster zurücksetzen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixermodus ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Kanal des internen Mixers kann nach 2 Vorgaben gemischt werden, diese sind [[#LTP|LTP]] und [[#HTP|HTP]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projekt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können verschiedene Projekte (Shows) generieren, speichern und (jeweils zu einem Zeitpunkt genau ein Projekt) laden. In DMXControl enthält ein Projekt alle Projektdaten, die für eine Show relevant sind. Solche Daten sind unter anderem welche DMX-Geräte verwendet werden, erstellte Szenen und Effekte, Ein- und Ausgabekonfigurationen und einiges mehr. Sie werden von den einzelnen Modulen von DMXC in einem gemeinsamen Ordner aber mit unterschiedlichen Dateiendungen gespeichert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darüber hinaus gibt es auch sog. &#039;&#039;globale Daten&#039;&#039;, die DMXControl projektübergreifend in einem separaten Verzeichnis (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;quot;%Appdata%/PopSoft/&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) speichert. Zu diesen globalen Daten gehören auch Einstellungen der MIDI- und DMX-Fernsteuerungen. Daher müssen diese Daten beim Kopieren eines Projektes auf einen anderen Computer auch mitkopiert werden. Wie das am einfachsten funktioniert, kann in [[Pack_And_Go_DMXC2|Kapitel 31]] nachgelesen werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== S ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spektrum ===&lt;br /&gt;
Zerlegung des Frequenzbandes einer Audio-Datei in unterschiedliche Intervalle. Alle Intervalle zusammen bilden das Spektrum. In DMXControl können den Intervallen Kanäle zugeordnet werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Startadresse ===&lt;br /&gt;
Jedes physikalische Gerät in einer DMX-Signalkette besitzt eine sogenannte Start- oder Basisadresse. Diese wird am Gerät selbst eingestellt, idealerweise ist sie identisch mit der Startardresse des [[#Gerät|Gerätes]] in DMXControl. Diese Adresse bezeichnet den niedrigsten, aber nicht zwingend den einzigen, Kanal, ab dem ein Gerät die DMX-Werte verarbeitet. Ein 4-kanaliger Dimmer mit der Startadresse 5 wertet die Kanäle 5,6,7 und 8 aus, ein Movinghead kann für seine Funktionen durchaus 15 oder mehr Kanäle belegen. Es ist auch möglich, mehreren Geräten die gleiche Startadresse zuzuweisen. Dies kann zu ungewollten Resultaten führen, jedoch auch bei gleichen Scheinwerfern bewusst eingesetzt werden für synchrone Ausgaben. &lt;br /&gt;
Wie die Startadresse eingestellt wird, hänge vom Gerät ab, beachten Sie hierbei bitte die Bedienungsanleitung des Herstellers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text = Im Dialog Gerätekonfiguration werden zur gewählten Startadresse die Positionen eines DIP-Schalterklavieres angezeigt. &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Submaster ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ein Submaster ist ein [[#Fader|Fader]], der Werte von verschiedenen Kanälen gemeinsam steuern kann. Das Submaster-Konzept wird in DMXControl durch das [[Submaster DMXC2| Submaster Tool]] realisiert, wobei jeder Submaster aus einem Fader und einem Flashbutton besteht. Mittels eines Submasters können zum Beispiel gleiche Funktionen gebündelt werden, also alle Rot-Kanäle von 10 LED-Scheinwerfern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szene ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine Show besteht aus diversen Szenen. Eine Szene ist eine momentane Einstellung aller angeschlossenen Geräte (DMX-Werte). Pro Szene kann eine Einblendzeit sowie eine Haltezeit angegeben werden, welche jedoch nur innerhalb der [[#Szenenliste|Szenenliste]] oder eines [[#Effekt|Effekt]]es zum Tragen kommt. Werte einer Szene bleiben auf der Ausgabe aktiv, bis sie explizit überschrieben werden, beispielsweise durch eine andere Szene. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Bild_mit_Unterschrift |DMXC2_Manual_Szenenliste_NeueSzene.png|3|Erstellung einer neuen Szene|400px}} &lt;br /&gt;
Neben der „&#039;&#039;Einfachen Szene&#039;&#039;“ können [[#Befehl|Befehle]], Bewegungs- oder [[#Audioszene|Audioszenen]] verwendet werden. Alle Szenen werden in der Szenenbibliothek verwaltet und können von dort gewählt und wiederverwendet werden. Kompositionsszenen können beliebige Szenentypen zusammenfassen.	&lt;br /&gt;
{{BoxHinweis&lt;br /&gt;
|Text =  Der Begriff der &#039;&#039;&#039;Szene&#039;&#039;&#039; aus DMXControl enspricht dem der &#039;&#039;&#039;cues&#039;&#039;&#039; aus verschiedenen anderen Lichtsteuerprogrammen.  &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Szenenliste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Eine oder mehrere Szenen bilden eine Szenenliste. Die maximale Anzahl von Szenen pro Szenenliste ist nur durch die Ressourcen Ihres Rechners eingeschränkt. Das Abspielen einer Szenenliste bedeutet die sequentielle Ausführung aller Einzelszenen unter Berücksichtigung von deren Einblendzeit und Dauer. Die Szenen können auch manuell weitergeschaltet werden. Mehrere Szenenlisten können zu einem Zeitpunkt parallel ablaufen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ü ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Überblendpunkt ===&lt;br /&gt;
Der „&#039;&#039;Einsatzpunkt&#039;&#039;“ wird beim Überblenden zwischen zwei Lichtstimmungen verwendet. Während als Kanäle mit dem Attribut &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;fade=yes&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (Dimmer) weich übergeblendet werden, müssen die übrigen Kanäle (Shutter, Goborad) an einer Stelle abrupt auf den neuen Wert gesetzt werden. Der Einsetzpunkt stellt die Stelle auf der Zeitleiste (zwischen 0 und 100% der Überblendung) dar, an der das Umschalten passiert. Auf diese Weise können Gobos entweder am Anfang oder am Ende der Einblendzeit gewechselt werden. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Referenzen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{End-LaTeX}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{NavigationTop-Man2&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkBackwards = Magic_3D_Easy_View_Plugin_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextBackwards = Magic 3D Easy View Plugin&lt;br /&gt;
| LinkForwards =  Command_overview_DMXC2&lt;br /&gt;
| TextForwards =  Command overview&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Glossar_DMXC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: DMXControl 2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Steiny</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>